PART 6 - ELECTRICAL WORKS

Technical Specifications Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

PART 6. ELECTRICAL WORKS .................................................................................. 10

SECTION.1 EXTERNAL WORKS................................................................................................................ 10

6.1.1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 10
6.1.1.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 10
6.1.1.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................... 10
6.1.1.1.2 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................... 10
6.1.1.1.3 DRAWINGS............................................................................................................................. 10
6.1.1.1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 11
6.1.1.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 12
6.1.1.1.6 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 12
6.1.1.1.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ............................................................................................... 12
6.1.1.1.7.1 Manufacturers' Standards.............................................................................................. 12
6.1.1.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES ........................................................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1.1 Material .......................................................................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1.2 Raceway and Cable Supports ......................................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1.3 Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit ............................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1.4 Expansion Anchors ......................................................................................................... 13
6.1.1.2.1.5 Toggle Bolts .................................................................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................. 14
6.1.1.2.2.1 Identification Devices ..................................................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2.2 Raceway and Cable Labels ............................................................................................. 14
6.1.1.2.2.3 Underground Warning Tape .......................................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2.4 Equipment Nameplates.................................................................................................. 14
6.1.1.2.2.5 Color-Coding Cable Ties ................................................................................................. 14
6.1.1.2.2.6 Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates ................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2.7 Interior Warning and Caution Signs ............................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2.8 Exterior Warning and Caution Signs............................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.2.9 Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs .............................................................................. 14
6.1.1.2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES......................................................................................................... 14
6.1.1.2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS ........................................................................... 15
6.1.1.2.5 CONCRETE BASES................................................................................................................... 15
6.1.1.2.6 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY EMPLOYER ..................................................... 15
6.1.1.2.7 TOUCHUP PAINT .................................................................................................................... 15
6.1.1.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 15
6.1.1.3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 15
6.1.1.3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION ................................................................... 15
6.1.1.3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 16
6.1.1.3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES ........................................................................... 16
6.1.1.3.5 FIRE STOPPING....................................................................................................................... 17
6.1.1.3.6 CONCRETE BASES................................................................................................................... 17
6.1.1.3.7 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR ................................................................................... 17
6.1.1.3.8 HOLES AND ANCHORS ........................................................................................................... 17
6.1.1.3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING ...................................................................................................... 18
6.1.1.3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................................... 18
6.1.1.3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING .............................................................................. 18
6.1.1.3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .............................................................................................. 18
6.1.2 PANELBOARDS ..................................................................................................................................... 18
6.1.2.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 18
6.1.2.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................... 18
6.1.2.1.2 DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................................... 18
6.1.2.1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 19
6.1.2.1.3.1 Equipment Data ............................................................................................................. 19
6.1.2.1.3.2 Tests and Certificates ..................................................................................................... 19

Technical Specifications 6-1 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.2.1.3.3 Details of Electrical Closets ............................................................................................ 19

6.1.2.1.3.4 Panelboard Schedules .................................................................................................... 19
6.1.2.1.3.5 Maintenance Data .......................................................................................................... 19
6.1.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 19
6.1.2.1.5 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 20
6.1.2.1.6 SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................................ 20
6.1.2.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 20
6.1.2.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 20
6.1.2.2.1.1 Arrangement .................................................................................................................. 20
6.1.2.2.1.2 Branch Circuit Numbering .............................................................................................. 20
6.1.2.2.2 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES................................................................................................... 20
6.1.2.2.2.1 Type ................................................................................................................................ 20
6.1.2.2.2.2 Construction ................................................................................................................... 20
6.1.2.2.2.3 Finish .............................................................................................................................. 21
6.1.2.2.3 BUSBARS ................................................................................................................................ 21
6.1.2.2.3.1 Type ................................................................................................................................ 21
6.1.2.2.3.2 Design ............................................................................................................................. 21
6.1.2.2.3.3 Rating ............................................................................................................................. 21
6.1.2.2.3.4 Short-circuit Duty ........................................................................................................... 21
6.1.2.2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs) ......................................................................... 21
6.1.2.2.4.1 Type ................................................................................................................................ 21
6.1.2.2.4.2 Circuit Breaker Trip Units ............................................................................................... 21
6.1.2.2.4.3 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Units ................................................................. 22
6.1.2.2.4.4 Compensation ................................................................................................................ 22
6.1.2.2.4.5 Electronic Trips Units ..................................................................................................... 22
6.1.2.2.4.6 Switching Mechanism .................................................................................................... 22
6.1.2.2.4.7 MCCBs for SMDBs Type 2 ............................................................................................... 22
6.1.2.2.4.8 MCCBs for SMDB Type 1 ................................................................................................ 22
6.1.2.2.4.9 Tripped Position ............................................................................................................. 22
6.1.2.2.4.10 Interchangeable Trips .................................................................................................. 22
6.1.2.2.4.11 Accessories ................................................................................................................... 22
6.1.2.2.4.12 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers ................................................................................. 23
6.1.2.2.5 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs) ................................................................................ 23
6.1.2.2.5.1 Construction: .................................................................................................................. 23
6.1.2.2.5.2 Operation ....................................................................................................................... 23
6.1.2.2.5.3 Ratings ............................................................................................................................ 23
6.1.2.2.6 MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS) ............................................................................................... 23
6.1.2.2.7 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (SMDB) .................................................................................. 23
6.1.2.2.7.1 SMDB Type 1 .................................................................................................................. 23
6.1.2.2.7.2 SMDB Type 2 .................................................................................................................. 24
6.1.2.2.8 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS - GENERALLY........................................................... 24
6.1.2.2.8.1 Arrangement .................................................................................................................. 24
6.1.2.2.8.2 Indoor Enclosure ............................................................................................................ 24
6.1.2.2.9 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB........................................................................... 24
6.1.2.2.9.1 Type ................................................................................................................................ 24
6.1.2.2.9.2 Internal Assembly........................................................................................................... 24
6.1.2.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 25
6.1.2.3.1 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 25
6.1.2.3.1.1 Fixing Generally: ............................................................................................................. 25
6.1.2.3.1.2 Panelboard Interiors ...................................................................................................... 25
6.1.2.3.1.3 Wiring Inside Panelboards ............................................................................................. 25
6.1.2.3.1.4 Protection....................................................................................................................... 25
6.1.2.3.1.5 Mounting Heights........................................................................................................... 25
6.1.2.3.1.6 Mounting........................................................................................................................ 25
6.1.2.3.1.7 Circuit Directory ............................................................................................................. 25
6.1.2.3.2 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 25
6.1.2.3.2.1 Panelboard Nameplates ................................................................................................. 26

Technical Specifications 6-2 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.2.3.3 CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 26

6.1.2.3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 26
6.1.2.3.4.1 Generally ........................................................................................................................ 26
6.1.2.3.4.2 Circuit Breakers .............................................................................................................. 26
6.1.2.3.4.3 Insulation Check Tests .................................................................................................... 26
6.1.2.3.5 FACTORY TEST ....................................................................................................................... 26
6.1.2.3.6 ADJUSTING ............................................................................................................................ 26
6.1.2.3.7 CLEANING .............................................................................................................................. 26
6.1.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ................................................................................................................. 26
6.1.3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 26
6.1.3.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................... 27
6.1.3.1.2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 27
6.1.3.1.2.1 Technical Data ................................................................................................................ 27
6.1.3.1.2.2 Shop and Construction Drawings ................................................................................... 27
6.1.3.1.2.3 Certificate of Origin ........................................................................................................ 27
6.1.3.1.2.4 Field Test Reports ........................................................................................................... 27
6.1.3.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 27
6.1.3.1.3.1 Installer Qualifications ................................................................................................... 27
6.1.3.1.3.2 Standards ....................................................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.1.5 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.2.1 GENERALLY ............................................................................................................................ 28
6.1.3.2.1.1 Conductors ..................................................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.2.1.2 Buried Cables ................................................................................................................. 28
6.1.3.2.2 LV WIRES AND CABLES........................................................................................................... 28
6.1.3.2.2.1 Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires) ........................................................ 28
6.1.3.2.2.2 Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV) ................................................................... 29
6.1.3.2.2.3 Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV) ..................................................... 29
6.1.3.2.2.4 Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV) ..................................................... 29
6.1.3.2.2.5 Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables ................................................................................ 29
6.1.3.2.3 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES ............................................................................................. 29
6.1.3.2.4 CONNECTORS (LV POWER) .................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.2.4.1 Connector - Type A-1 ..................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.2.4.2 Connector - Type A-2 ..................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.2.4.3 Connector - Type B-1...................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 30
6.1.3.3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.3.2 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 30
6.1.3.3.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 30
6.1.3.3.2.2 Circuits............................................................................................................................ 30
6.1.3.3.2.3 Support........................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3.3.2.4 Wiring at Outlets ............................................................................................................ 31
6.1.3.3.2.5 Extra Length ................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3.3.2.6 Terminations .................................................................................................................. 31
6.1.3.3.2.7 Tagging ........................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3.3.2.8 Tagging ........................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3.3.2.8.1 Cable support.......................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3.3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV) ............................................................ 32
6.1.3.3.3.1 Fixing .............................................................................................................................. 32
6.1.3.3.3.2 Clamps ............................................................................................................................ 32
6.1.3.3.3.3 Exposure to Heat ............................................................................................................ 32
6.1.3.3.4 CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 33
6.1.3.3.4.1 Recommendations ......................................................................................................... 33
6.1.3.3.4.2 Jointing ........................................................................................................................... 33
6.1.3.3.5 FACTORY TEST ....................................................................................................................... 33
6.1.3.3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 33

Technical Specifications 6-3 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.3.3.6.1 Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 33

6.1.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES ............................................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.1.4.1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.3.1 Technical Data ................................................................................................................ 34
6.1.4.1.3.2 Shop and Construction Drawings ................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.3.3 Certificate of Origin ........................................................................................................ 34
6.1.4.1.3.4 Cable Jointing Qualifications .......................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.3.5 Qualification Data .......................................................................................................... 34
6.1.4.1.3.6 Product Test Reports ...................................................................................................... 35
6.1.4.1.3.7 Maintenance Data .......................................................................................................... 35
6.1.4.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 35
6.1.4.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................................... 35
6.1.4.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 35
6.1.4.2.1 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................. 35
6.1.4.2.2 18/30 kV MV CABLE ............................................................................................................... 35
6.1.4.2.3 8.7/15 kV MV CABLE .............................................................................................................. 36
6.1.4.2.4 SPLICING AND TERMINATING PRODUCTS ............................................................................. 37
6.1.4.2.4.1 Types .............................................................................................................................. 37
6.1.4.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 37
6.1.4.3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 37
6.1.4.3.2 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 37
6.1.4.3.2.1 Pull Conductors .............................................................................................................. 37
6.1.4.3.3 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING .................................................................................... 38
6.1.4.3.3.1 Recommendations ......................................................................................................... 38
6.1.4.3.3.2 Jointing ........................................................................................................................... 38
6.1.4.3.4 FACTORY TEST ....................................................................................................................... 38
6.1.4.3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL....................................................................................................... 38
6.1.4.3.5.1 Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 38
6.1.4.3.5.2 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 39
6.1.4.3.6 PROTECTION .......................................................................................................................... 39
6.1.5 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES ............................................................................ 39
6.1.5.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 39
6.1.5.1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 39
6.1.5.1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................... 39
6.1.5.1.2.1 Underground Ducts for Electrical, Ultra Low Voltage (ULV), Cables .............................. 39
6.1.5.1.2.2 Manholes and Handholes .............................................................................................. 39
6.1.5.1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 39
6.1.5.1.3.1 Product Data .................................................................................................................. 39
6.1.5.1.3.2 Shop Drawings................................................................................................................ 39
6.1.5.1.3.3 Coordination Drawings................................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.1.3.4 Field Test Reports ........................................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.1.3.5 Record (as-Built) Documents ......................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 40
6.1.5.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.1.6.1 Existing Utilities .............................................................................................................. 40
6.1.5.1.7 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) DUCTS ...................................................................................... 40
6.1.5.2.1.1 PVC Ducts for Outdoor Power and Lighting Cable Installations ..................................... 40
6.1.5.2.1.2 Duct Supports................................................................................................................. 40
6.1.5.2.1.3 Duct Sealing Compound ................................................................................................. 40
6.1.5.2.2 COVERS FOR MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES ......................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.2.1 Frames and Covers ......................................................................................................... 41

Technical Specifications 6-4 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.5.2.3 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 41

6.1.5.2.3.1 Concrete ......................................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.3.2 Concrete-Envelope ......................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.3.3 Cable Manholes and Handholes..................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.4 PULL BOXES ........................................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.4.1 Cast-Metal Boxes ........................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.2.4.2 Fibreglass Boxes ............................................................................................................. 41
6.1.5.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 41
6.1.5.3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.3.2 EARTHWORK .......................................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.3.2.1 Trenches ......................................................................................................................... 41
6.1.5.3.3 DIRECTLY BURIED PVC CABLE DUCTS .................................................................................... 42
6.1.5.3.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT ASSEMBLIES ........................................................................... 42
6.1.5.3.4.1 Slope............................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.5.3.4.2 Concrete-Encased Ducts ................................................................................................ 42
6.1.5.3.4.3 Sealing ............................................................................................................................ 42
6.1.5.3.5 ENDS OF DUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.5.3.5.1 Sealing Ends Of Ducts ..................................................................................................... 42
6.1.5.3.6 SLEEVES OR DUCTS IN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS.............................................................. 43
6.1.5.3.7 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION ........................................................... 43
6.1.5.3.7.1 Drainage ......................................................................................................................... 43
6.1.5.3.7.2 Waterproofing................................................................................................................ 43
6.1.5.3.7.3 Dampproofing ................................................................................................................ 43
6.1.5.3.7.4 Precast Concrete, Underground Structure Installation .................................................. 43
6.1.5.3.8 SUPPORTS .............................................................................................................................. 43
6.1.5.3.8.1 Inspection of Duct Systems ............................................................................................ 43
6.1.5.3.8.2 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 43
6.1.5.3.9 CLEANING .............................................................................................................................. 43
6.1.6 EXTERIOR LIGHTING............................................................................................................................. 43
6.1.6.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 43
6.1.6.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................... 44
6.1.6.1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 44
6.1.6.1.3 DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................................... 44
6.1.6.1.3.1 Lighting Unit ................................................................................................................... 44
6.1.6.1.3.2 Luminaire (Light Fixture) ................................................................................................ 44
6.1.6.1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 44
6.1.6.1.4.1 Equipment Data ............................................................................................................. 44
6.1.6.1.4.2 Shop and Construction Drawings ................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.4.3 Samples .......................................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.4.4 Product Certificates........................................................................................................ 45
6.1.6.1.4.5 Field Test Reports ........................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.4.6 Maintenance Data .......................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.4.7 As-Built Drawings ........................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 45
6.1.6.1.5.1 Standards ....................................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.5.2 Standards ....................................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.5.3 Technical Requirements ................................................................................................. 45
6.1.6.1.5.4 Ambient Conditions ....................................................................................................... 45
6.1.6.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES .................................................................. 46
6.1.6.1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS ................................................................................................................. 46
6.1.6.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................... 46
6.1.6.2.1 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................. 46
6.1.6.2.2 LIGHTING COLUMNS.............................................................................................................. 46
6.1.6.2.2.1 Construction ................................................................................................................... 46
6.1.6.2.2.2 Column Design ............................................................................................................... 46
6.1.6.2.2.3 Finish .............................................................................................................................. 46
6.1.6.2.2.4 Protection and Wiring .................................................................................................... 47

Technical Specifications 6-5 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.2.3 HIGH MASTS .......................................................................................................................... 47

6.1.6.2.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 47
6.1.6.2.3.2 High Mast Luminaire Ring .............................................................................................. 47
6.1.6.2.3.3 Winching System ............................................................................................................ 48
6.1.6.2.3.4 Finish .............................................................................................................................. 49
6.1.6.2.3.5 High Mast Accessories.................................................................................................... 49
6.1.6.2.3.6 Luminaires ...................................................................................................................... 49
6.1.6.2.4 FLOODLIGHTS ........................................................................................................................ 49
6.1.6.2.4.1 Type ................................................................................................................................ 50
6.1.6.2.4.2 Housing .......................................................................................................................... 50
6.1.6.2.4.3 Control Gear ................................................................................................................... 50
6.1.6.2.4.4 Finish .............................................................................................................................. 50
6.1.6.2.4.5 Mounting........................................................................................................................ 50
6.1.6.2.4.6 Earthing Terminals ......................................................................................................... 50
6.1.6.2.5 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES ........................................................................................................ 50
6.1.6.2.6 FEEDER PILLARS ..................................................................................................................... 51
6.1.6.2.6.1 Wiring ............................................................................................................................. 52
6.1.6.2.6.2 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................ 52
6.1.6.3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 52
6.1.6.3.1 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 52
6.1.6.3.1.1 Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 52
6.1.6.3.1.2 Column Bases ................................................................................................................. 52
6.1.6.3.1.3 Columns ......................................................................................................................... 52
6.1.6.3.1.4 Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming .......................................... 52
6.1.6.3.1.5 Mounting Adjustments .................................................................................................. 53
6.1.6.3.1.6 Luminaire Attachment ................................................................................................... 53
6.1.6.3.1.7 Cabling Conduits and Ductwork ..................................................................................... 53
6.1.6.3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE ........................................................................................... 53
6.1.6.3.3 CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 54
6.1.6.3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ................................................................................................... 54
6.1.7 EXTERNAL ULV NETWORK ................................................................................................................... 55
6.1.7.1 EXTERNAL ULV NETWORK FIBER LOOP DESCRIPTION ................................................................ 55
6.1.7.2 External ULV Network Logical Diagram ...................................................................................... 56
6.1.7.3 External ULV Network Splices for the Passenger Terminal......................................................... 57
6.1.7.4 External ULV Network Splices for the Air Traffic Control Tower ................................................ 58
6.1.7.5 General description of the Outdoor Optical Fiber cable............................................................. 59
6.1.7.6 Single mode OS2 cable features ................................................................................................. 59
6.1.7.7 Engineering rules ........................................................................................................................ 59
6.1.7.8 Recommendations for implementation...................................................................................... 59
6.1.7.9 Identification of optical links....................................................................................................... 60
6.1.7.10 Technical recipe .......................................................................................................................... 60
6.1.7.10.1 Visual control ....................................................................................................................... 60
6.1.7.10.2 Static tests ........................................................................................................................... 61
6.1.7.10.3 Class Ea dynamic tests of Optical link tests ......................................................................... 61
6.1.7.11 Control and reception ................................................................................................................. 61
6.1.7.12 Commissioning ............................................................................................................................ 61
6.1.7.13 Component and solution warranty ............................................................................................. 61
6.1.7.14 Component warranty .................................................................................................................. 61
6.1.7.15 Application Warranty .................................................................................................................. 62
SECTION.2 AIRFIELD LIGHTING EQUIPMENT........................................................................................... 63
6.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................. 63
6.2.1.1 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 63
6.2.1.2 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 63
6.2.1.3 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................ 63
6.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 64
6.2.1.5 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT ........................................................................................................ 65

Technical Specifications 6-6 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.2.1.5.1 Warranty................................................................................................................................ 65
6.2.1.5.2 Technical Support .................................................................................................................. 65
6.2.1.6 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................................... 65
6.2.1.6.1 Spare parts/ consumables ..................................................................................................... 65
6.2.2 PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................. 66
6.2.2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 66
6.2.2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 66
6.2.2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................... 68
6.2.2.3.1 ELEVATED APPROACH LIGHTS ............................................................................................... 68
6.2.2.3.2 INSET APPROACH LIGHTS ...................................................................................................... 69
6.2.2.3.3 COMBINED THRESHOLD / RUNWAY END INSET LIGHTS ........................................................ 70
6.2.2.3.4 THRESHOLD INSET LIGHTS ...................................................................................................... 70
6.2.2.3.5 RUNWAY EDGE INSET LIGHTS ................................................................................................ 70
6.2.2.3.6 TAXIWAY EDGE INSET LIGHTS (LED type) .............................................................................. 71
6.2.2.3.7 STOP BAR INSET LIGHTS (LED Type) ....................................................................................... 72
6.2.2.3.8 STOP BAR ELEVATED LIGHTS ................................................................................................. 73
6.2.2.3.9 STOP BAR INDUCTION LOOPS ................................................................................................ 73
6.2.2.3.10 RUNWAY GUARD LIGHTS (WIG-WAG) (LED Type) ............................................................... 74
6.2.2.3.11 PAPI UNIT............................................................................................................................. 74
6.2.2.3.12 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (“LED” Type) .................................................................................... 76
6.2.2.3.13 WINDCONE .......................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.2.3.13.1 Material Specification .................................................................................................. 76
6.2.2.3.13.2 Obstruction lighting ..................................................................................................... 76
6.2.2.3.13.2.1 Specifications of materials .................................................................................... 76
6.2.2.3.13.2.2 Power supply ........................................................................................................ 77
6.2.2.3.13.2.3 Controls - Controls ................................................................................................ 77
6.2.2.3.14 AIRFIELD GUIDANCE SIGNAGE ............................................................................................. 77
6.2.2.3.15 ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS, TWO-COMPONENT FOR SEALING WIRE AND LIGHTS IN
PAVEMENT 79
6.2.2.3.15.1 Curing ........................................................................................................................... 79
6.2.2.3.15.2 Caution ......................................................................................................................... 79
6.2.2.3.15.3 Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 79
6.2.2.3.15.4 Expansion ..................................................................................................................... 79
6.2.2.3.15.5 Test for Dielectric Strength .......................................................................................... 79
6.2.2.3.15.6 Test for Arc Resistance ................................................................................................. 80
6.2.2.3.15.7 Test for Adhesion to Steel ............................................................................................ 80
6.2.2.3.15.8 Adhesion to Portland Cement Concrete ...................................................................... 80
6.2.2.3.15.9 Bond Test ..................................................................................................................... 80
6.2.2.3.15.10 Compatibility with Asphalt Concrete ......................................................................... 81
6.2.2.3.15.11 Application ................................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2.3.16 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CABLES ................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2.3.16.1 AIRFIELD LIGHTING PRIMARY SERIES CABLES .............................................................. 81
6.2.2.3.16.2 AIRFIELD LIGHTING SECONDARY CABLES ..................................................................... 82
6.2.2.3.17 SERIES ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS .................................................................................... 82
6.2.2.3.18 CONSTANT CURRENT REGULATORS .................................................................................... 83
6.2.2.3.19 SERIES CIRCUIT CUT OUT ..................................................................................................... 87
6.2.2.3.20 CIRCUIT SELECTOR SWITCH ................................................................................................. 87
6.2.2.3.21 LIGHT BASES AND MOUNTING PROVISIONS ....................................................................... 88
6.2.2.3.22 EARTHING OF AFL INSTALLATIONS ...................................................................................... 88
6.2.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................... 88
6.2.3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 88
6.2.3.1.1 Test equipment and labour ................................................................................................... 89
6.2.3.1.2 Installation of Wire and Cable ............................................................................................... 89
6.2.3.1.3 Testing ................................................................................................................................... 89
6.2.3.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................. 90
6.2.3.3 SITE TESTING ............................................................................................................................... 90
6.2.3.4 DEMONSTRATION ....................................................................................................................... 91

Technical Specifications 6-7 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

SECTION.3 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEMS (AFLCMS) .................................. 93

6.3.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 93
6.3.1.1 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 93
6.3.1.2 SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................... 93
6.3.1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 94
6.3.1.4 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................ 96
6.3.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 97
6.3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................................................ 98
6.3.1.7 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT ........................................................................................................ 98
6.3.1.7.1 Warranty................................................................................................................................ 98
6.3.1.7.2 Technical Support .................................................................................................................. 98
6.3.1.8 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................................... 98
6.3.2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................... 98
6.3.2.1 MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................... 98
6.3.2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................ 98
6.3.2.2.1 EVENT MESSAGE CLASSIFICATION ....................................................................................... 102
6.3.2.2.2 EVENT MESSAGE HANDLING ............................................................................................... 103
6.3.2.2.3 WARNINGS .......................................................................................................................... 104
6.3.2.2.4 ALARMS ............................................................................................................................... 104
6.3.2.2.4.1 Audible Alarms ............................................................................................................. 105
6.3.2.2.5 AFLCMS- Configuration Management & Generation Tools ................................................. 105
6.3.2.2.5.1 Report Generation ....................................................................................................... 105
6.3.2.2.6 Reliability ............................................................................................................................. 106
6.3.2.2.7 Maintainability..................................................................................................................... 106
6.3.2.2.7.1 AFLCMS – Technical/Maintenance System Requirements .......................................... 106
6.3.2.2.8 Security Administration ....................................................................................................... 107
6.3.2.3 OPEN INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................... 107
6.3.2.3.1 EXTERNAL SYSTEM INTERFACE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 107
6.3.2.3.2 THE EXPECTED ENHANCED A-SMGCS FUNCTIONS: ............................................................. 108
6.3.2.4 SINGLE LAMP CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM............................................................... 109
6.3.2.4.1 System Response Time ........................................................................................................ 111
6.3.2.4.1.1 Single Command Response Time ................................................................................. 111
6.3.2.4.1.2 Multi Segment/ Multiple lighting System commands .................................................. 111
6.3.2.4.1.3 Aircraft/Vehicle detection sensor Response Time ....................................................... 111
6.3.2.4.1.4 Other Response Times ................................................................................................. 111
6.3.2.5 TAXIWAY SYSTEM CONTROL AND MONITORING ..................................................................... 111
6.3.2.5.1 Taxiway Routing .................................................................................................................. 112
6.3.2.5.1.1 Taxiway routing functions in two different modes. ..................................................... 112
6.3.2.5.1.1.1 Selector mode ....................................................................................................... 112
6.3.2.5.1.1.2 Planning mode ...................................................................................................... 112
6.3.2.5.2 Stop Bar Operation .............................................................................................................. 112
6.3.2.5.2.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 112
6.3.2.5.2.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................... 112
6.3.2.5.2.3 Taxiway Edge Lighting .................................................................................................. 113
6.3.2.5.2.4 Taxiway Guidance Signs ............................................................................................... 113
6.3.2.6 OPERATOR/ CONTROLLER INTERFACES (HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - HMI) ...................... 113
6.3.2.6.1 Requirements for Operator Interfaces (HMI) ...................................................................... 113
6.3.2.6.2 Controller Working Positions (ATC Station)......................................................................... 114
6.3.2.6.3 Touch Screen Requirements................................................................................................ 115
6.3.2.6.4 Controller Working Positions for the Runway and Taxiway Lighting .................................. 115
6.3.2.6.4.1 Airfield view ................................................................................................................. 115
6.3.2.6.4.2 Runway view ................................................................................................................ 116
6.3.2.6.4.3 Taxiway zooms ............................................................................................................. 116
6.3.2.6.4.4 Alarm view ................................................................................................................... 116
6.3.2.6.5 Training/Simulator Workstations ........................................................................................ 116
6.3.2.6.6 Technical Working Positions (Maintenance Station) ........................................................... 116
6.3.2.6.7 Local Control in the Substation and Field Sensors............................................................... 119

Technical Specifications 6-8 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.3.2.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS................................................................................................... 120

6.3.2.7.1 Central Processing Units (CPUs) and Computers................................................................. 121
6.3.2.7.2 LCD Color Monitors ............................................................................................................. 121
6.3.2.7.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): .................................................................................. 121
6.3.2.7.4 Printer .................................................................................................................................. 121
6.3.2.7.5 Remote Control (RCU) I/O Unit ........................................................................................... 121
6.3.2.7.6 HARDWARE DESIGN VERSION CONTROL:............................................................................ 122
6.3.2.8 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CONTROL NETWORK ................................................................................. 122
6.3.2.9 AFLCMS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 123
6.3.2.9.1 SOFTWARE VERSION CONTROL ........................................................................................... 124
6.3.2.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLE ................................................................................................................... 124
6.3.2.10.1 Manufacturing Qualifications ............................................................................................ 125
6.3.2.10.2 Technical Data ................................................................................................................... 125
6.3.2.10.3 Cable Tests......................................................................................................................... 126
6.3.2.10.4 Field Installation Tests. ...................................................................................................... 126
6.3.2.10.5 Cable Fire Proofing ............................................................................................................ 127
6.3.3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................................ 128
6.3.3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 128
6.3.3.1.1 Materials.............................................................................................................................. 128
6.3.3.1.2 Control Tower Installation ................................................................................................... 128
6.3.3.1.3 Substation Installation ......................................................................................................... 128
6.3.3.1.4 Maintenance Shop Installation ............................................................................................ 128
6.3.3.1.5 Airfield Installation .............................................................................................................. 128
6.3.3.1.5.1 INSTALLATION INSPECTION.......................................................................................... 128
6.3.3.1.5.2 TESTING ........................................................................................................................ 128
6.3.3.1.5.2.1 Factory Acceptance Test ....................................................................................... 128
6.3.3.1.5.2.2 Site Acceptance Test ............................................................................................. 129
6.3.3.1.5.3 TRAINING ..................................................................................................................... 129
6.3.3.1.5.3.1 Training Schedule.................................................................................................. 129
6.3.3.1.5.3.1.1 Training .......................................................................................................... 129
6.3.3.1.5.3.2 ATC Training .......................................................................................................... 129
6.3.3.1.5.3.3 Maintenance/ Operation Training ........................................................................ 130
6.3.3.1.5.3.4 System Engineer/ System Administrator Training ................................................ 130
6.3.3.1.5.3.5 Training Aids ......................................................................................................... 131

Technical Specifications 6-9 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

PART 6. ELECTRICAL WORKS

SECTION.1 EXTERNAL WORKS

6.1.1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND REQUIREMENTS

6.1.1.1 GENERAL

6.1.1.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of electrical work as specified in each section of the specification will include but is not necessarily
limited to:
1. MV 33kV and 11 kV networks;
2. Airfield Lighting;
3. APRON Floodlighting;
4. Exterior Lighting.
This Section includes the following:
1. General provisions;
2. Supporting devices for electrical components;
3. Electrical identification;
4. Covers, brackets and supports;
5. Concrete equipment bases.
Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on the Drawings and/or described in the
Specification together with all associated ancillary work, support work and builder's work in connection.
Generally, the BOQ provides indicative quantities and is not to be considered as limitative to the scope of work.
It is provided for guidance only.

6.1.1.1.2 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the local codes of practice, local
power authority regulations and Requirements where not in contradiction with the local codes of practice and
regulations, herein referred to collectively as 'the Regulations'.
Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or construction
methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in
writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and perform the work as though called for to
minimum code standards.
Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be manufactured and installed in
compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following or other equal and approved standards:
1. IEC: The International Electro-Technical Commission
2. ISO: The International Standardization Organization
3. EN: European Norm
4. NF-USE: The French Regulation
5. BS: The British regulation
6. CCITT: The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
7. CCIR: The International Radio Consultative Committee
8. CISPR: The International Special Committee on Radio Interference
9. EIA/TIA: Electronics Industries association / Telecommunications Industry Associations.
10. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
Local standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the standards.

6.1.1.1.3 DRAWINGS
Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and general layout of equipment.
Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions, weights, mounting methods and accessories,
where relevant, are to be shown on Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the Drawings, the symbols
Technical Specifications 6-10 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted devices, take up more space on the Drawings than
the device does on the wall. Because of drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being
indicative rather than exact physical locations of the devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for
convenience of operation and the proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with the scaled locations
of the symbols. In locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on detail Drawings where provided, and
coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design Drawings.
Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to defining basic positions, circuiting,
loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of routing of circuits are to be shown on the
Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work, such as motor control
centres/panels, cables to motors and other similar electrically operated equipment are shown for convenience and
reference only.

6.1.1.1.4 SUBMITTALS
Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction drawings and other
information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or materials and before executing any
related work on site.
Shop and Construction Drawings:
1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering equipment.
2. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design requirements are understood
by indicating all equipment and material proposed to be supplied and installed and by detailing
fabrication and installation methods proposed to be used. Shop and construction drawings are to
clearly state the name and location of the work, the names of Engineer and Contractor, submission
date, cross-references to the Drawings and Specification and the specific reference number, location,
service and function of each item.
3. Shop and construction drawings are to be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for general layout plans,
and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for sections, details, elevations, congested layouts, etc.
Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
4. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and
openings for passage through floor structure.
5. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing locations of cables,
conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other
critical locations
6. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to clearances, access, sleeves,
electrical connections, location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc…
7. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate compliance with Standards for
allocation of spaces for maintenance, movement, installation, etc.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original catalogues or catalogue cuts,
characteristics, model number, application and operating criteria of all equipment and materials, together with
other information necessary to satisfy Engineer that proposed equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.
List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all items for which choice of
manufacturer is at own discretion, is to be submitted for approval.
Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the project is to be assembled by the
manufacturer or his authorized assembler. Submit the necessary documents to substantiate the above including
the assembler staff training, quality control, etc. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any local assembler if
the information submitted is not sufficient. The Engineer's rejection in that respect is final and not subject to
discussion.
Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and reports for equipment
and devices. Complete test results are to be submitted in clearly identified and organised booklets, indicating
item of equipment, make, model, type, date of tests, type of tests, descriptions and procedures. Include in the test
reports the Quality Assurance Certification, the standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to
which the equipment was tested.
Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment is to comply with the relevant standards
recommendations and is to be witnessed by Engineer. If the manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not

Technical Specifications 6-11 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

complying with the standards, then independent laboratory tests are to be carried out on equipment in accordance
with the Specification and the Standards, and as required by Engineer. The Engineer's requirements in that
respect are final and not subject to discussion.
Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare parts to be provided, as required by
the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to
site.
Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of tools and instruments to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's unit price including
packaging and delivery to site.
Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all equipment and devices to be
labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and fixing methods of each label indicating its application.
Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of equipment for which
samples cannot be submitted are to be demonstrated in existing installations or by manufacturer's information,
test certificates and reports.

6.1.1.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with related Standards, specified therein.
Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.

6.1.1.1.6 COORDINATION
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building
structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are
constructed.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work.
Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing
electrical power and other services.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of
identification devices with completion of finished surface.
Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings and devices,
coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

6.1.1.1.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work prior to submission
for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be available, submit alternative items of equal
quality and type for approval.
Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics where required are
compatible with the requirements of the Local Power Authority or other Authorities having jurisdiction and are
acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any modifications necessary to comply with the Local Power Authority's
requirements.

6.1.1.1.7.1 Manufacturers' Standards

Equipment is to be the latest standard product of the manufacturer. Component parts are to be the product of a
single manufacturer, unless otherwise approved and provided that components made by other manufacturers are
of a standard design and are interchangeable.
Factory Assembly: Equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory assembled units ready for
installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other purposes is to be arranged to limit site

Technical Specifications 6-12 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

work to simple re- assembly and inter-wiring of control and power cabling.
Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved location, under cover, free from
humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and humidity is to be kept in climatically
conditioned areas until installed and handed over.
Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective equipment during the
Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for repair or replacement.
Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the manufacturer (including his
agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment or parts thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering
materials and workmanship for the period stated in the Specification, starting at substantial completion. Assign
the benefits of such warranty to the Employer.
Spare Parts Schedules: Submit, with the Tender, itemized schedules of commissioning spares and spare parts
(recommended for 2 years) to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets of tools and instruments
required by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate duty, service or
function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels are to have English / French. Alternative methods of labeling
may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent
surfaces or as approved by Engineer.
Systems used before substantial completion are to have all consumable elements, such as lamps etc. and
defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior to the date of substantial completion.

6.1.1.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.1.2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

6.1.1.2.1.1 Material
Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm diameter slotted holes at a
maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles
with 14-mm diameter holes at a maximum of 200-mm centers in at least one surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles.
2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be
stainless steel.

6.1.1.2.1.2 Raceway and Cable Supports

Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers,
wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

6.1.1.2.1.3 Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit

Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical
cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual
risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

6.1.1.2.1.4 Expansion Anchors

Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

Technical Specifications 6-13 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.1.2.1.5 Toggle Bolts

All-steel springhead type.

6.1.1.2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

6.1.1.2.2.1 Identification Devices

A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by these
Specifications.

6.1.1.2.2.2 Raceway and Cable Labels

Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size to meet
Standards.
1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic
band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Type: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with a clear,
weather-and chemical-resistant coating.
3. Color: Black letters on orange background.
4. Legend: Indicates voltage.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 25
mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.

6.1.1.2.2.3 Underground Warning Tape

Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the following features:
1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and
letters.

6.1.1.2.2.4 Equipment Nameplates

Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in French/English and firmly fixed to equipment at factory. Nameplates
are to indicate name and address of manufacturer, model, serial number, basic characteristics and ratings of
equipment and are to include elementary diagrams etc., all in accordance with the Standards.

6.1.1.2.2.5 Color-Coding Cable Ties

Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.

6.1.1.2.2.6 Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates

Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm minimum
thickness for signs up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black
letters on white background.

6.1.1.2.2.7 Interior Warning and Caution Signs

Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors,
legend, and size appropriate to the application.

6.1.1.2.2.8 Exterior Warning and Caution Signs

Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing,
with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 6-mm grommets in corners for mounting.

6.1.1.2.2.9 Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs

Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock
washers.

6.1.1.2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES

Technical Specifications 6-14 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, are to be flanged
checkered steel plates with angle or channel-section frames, suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and
finished with zinc chromate primer and two coats gray enamel.

6.1.1.2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS

Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to be galvanized steel, fixed with
expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts and lead anchors are not acceptable unless
approved for specific light duty installations.

6.1.1.2.5 CONCRETE BASES

Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than 100 mm larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and
setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated.
Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength
Reinforcing bars: minimum yield strength of 400 MPa (according to NFA 35-27)
Portland Cement: CEM I 42.5 E5 (according to NFP 15-319)

6.1.1.2.6 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY EMPLOYER

Protective relays shall be of the draw-out type with hand reset operation indicator and be fitted with test blocks.
Relays shall be capable of being removed without short circuiting the CTs or causing the protection to operate.
Positive drive mechanical position indicators shall be provided for each circuit breaker and motor starter.
It shall be possible to mechanically trip circuit breakers at the switchboard or electrically trip from any operating
position.
When a circuit breaker is in the test, withdrawn or earth position, operation shall only be possible from the
switchboard.

6.1.1.2.7 TOUCHUP PAINT

For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

6.1.1.3 EXECUTION

6.1.1.3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Installations Generally:
1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and Regulations,
ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to provide safe and protected
systems with equipment readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
2. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and coordinated with
all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or
recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install
components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
Materials and Components : Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, unless otherwise indicated.
Equipment : Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease
of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
Right of Way : Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

6.1.1.3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.

Technical Specifications 6-15 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum
of 90-kg design load.

6.1.1.3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps,
attachments and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the
future.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by
raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal
boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on
opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 600 mm from the
box.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and
junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless coredrilled holes are used.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-
rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform
fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock
washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or
other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load.

6.1.1.3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with
corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:

Technical Specifications 6-16 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape.
Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-
color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 15m maximum
intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum intervals in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
4. Fire Alarm System: Red.
5. Security System: Blue and yellow.
6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each
cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.
Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power,
control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 150 to
200 mm below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does
not exceed 400 mm, overall, use a single line marker.
Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate
signs for outdoor items.
Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 9-
mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency
operations.

6.1.1.3.5 FIRE STOPPING

Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-
resistance rating of the assembly.

6.1.1.3.6 CONCRETE BASES

Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than 100 mm larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and
setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated.
Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength
Reinforcing bars: minimum yield strength of 400 MPa (according to NFA 35-27)
Portland Cement: CEM I 42.5 E5 (according to NFP 15-319)

6.1.1.3.7 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR

Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on the Drawings or required by
equipment design, are to be installed prior to pouring concrete.

6.1.1.3.8 HOLES AND ANCHORS

Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in approved positions.
Holes and chases in situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete or drill holes larger than 10-mm
diameter without prior approval.
Holes and Chases in Pre-Cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete without prior approval.
Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without prior approval.
Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.
2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
Cutting Masonry:
1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.
2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spilling, cracking or other damage to surrounding structure.

Technical Specifications 6-17 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set back to back; offset
by a distance not less than wall thickness.
Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which exceed 450-mm
width.

6.1.1.3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical
installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install
new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other
surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

6.1.1.3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electrical identification.
3. Electricity-metering components.
4. Concrete bases.
5. Electrical demolition.
6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
7. Touchup painting.

6.1.1.3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

Refinish and touch up paint.
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the
degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

6.1.1.3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
paint spots, and construction debris.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

6.1.2 PANELBOARDS

6.1.2.1 GENERAL

6.1.2.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Panelboards for distribution of electric power and for protection of circuits, including fixing and supporting
materials and materials for termination of feeders, sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1. Lighting, Power and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
2. Distribution panelboards.

6.1.2.1.2 DEFINITIONS
MCB : Miniature circuit breaker.
MCCB : Molded case circuit breaker.
MCS : Molded Case Switch.
LP, PP : Final branch circuit lighting panelboards and power panelboards

Technical Specifications 6-18 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
protection on branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
SMDB : Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCS on the main
incoming for isolation and MCCB protection on outgoing feeders, Type 1 or Type 2.
Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from the emergency source are prefixed
with the letter “E” and with letter “U” if supplied from UPS source.
ELCB : Earth leakage circuit breaker.
RMS : Root mean square.

6.1.2.1.3 SUBMITTALS

6.1.2.1.3.1 Equipment Data

Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected
2. Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and ratings
compensation at and above 40 deg C ambient conditions and corresponding temperatures within the
enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations of circuit
breakers.

6.1.2.1.3.2 Tests and Certificates

Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test records in accordance with the Standards.
Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. The exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings of
circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and outgoing feeder/ branch
circuit conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and materials used.

6.1.2.1.3.3 Details of Electrical Closets

Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of the installation of proposed equipment, prior to
starting construction.
Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.

6.1.2.1.3.4 Panelboard Schedules

For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load balancing.

6.1.2.1.3.5 Maintenance Data

For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current protective
device.

6.1.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with
1. IEC 60439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".
2. IEC 60947-2 "Molded case circuit breakers"
3. IEC 60898 "Miniature circuit breakers"
4. Other components where not specified are to comply with the relevant IEC standards

Technical Specifications 6-19 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.2.1.5 COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls
or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances
to workspace clearance requirements.

6.1.2.1.6 SCHEDULES
Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard using the following
criteria:
1. Type of construction (MCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.
2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main moulded case switch size (maximum continuous rating).
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.

6.1.2.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.2.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Rated insulation voltage is to be in accordance with the respective standards.
Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 41 for indoor installations and IP 54
for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 144 and are to be factory designed and assembled.
Earthing bar is to be half size the phase busbars.
Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars.
Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
Circuit breakers are to be the non-fused type.

6.1.2.2.1.1 Arrangement
Panelboards are to have one main incoming moulded case switch and the required number of branch circuit
breakers, including spare circuit breakers for future expansion. Three-phase panelboards are to be designed for
sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.

6.1.2.2.1.2 Branch Circuit Numbering

On 3-phase panelboard schedules, circuits 1 and 2 are to be connected to red (R) phase, 3 and 4 to brown (Br)
phase, 5 and 6 to black (B) phase etc.., to conform with branch circuit numbering shown on the drawings.

6.1.2.2.2 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES

6.1.2.2.2.1 Type
General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface mounted as shown on the
drawings, comprising a box, trim, or trim and door to approved manufacturer's standards and sizes. Generally,
dimensions of panelboards are to be suitably selected to provide an additional 30% space reservation.

6.1.2.2.2.2 Construction
Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-galvanized sheet steel of gauges not less than specified and
in accordance with the standards. Welded joints are to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to
conform to the standards, adequate for the utilized cables/wires subject to the engineers’ approval and in no case
less than 100 mm on all sides. The enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support and
adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to form a dead front
panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps engaging the flange of the box (use of screws
engaging holes in the flange of the box is not acceptable). Screws, where used, are to be oval-head, countersunk
and flush. Trims for flush mounted panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for
surface mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock and catch. Doors

Technical Specifications 6-20 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple point latch mechanisms. Locks are to be keyed
alike.

6.1.2.2.2.3 Finish
Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc… Are to be cleaned, phosphatized, chrome passivated
and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to
mechanical injury, heat, acid and alkali solvents, grease, ageing and corrosion and of standard gray color to the
approval of Engineer.
Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to be provided on inside face of
doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are specified. Directories are to be typed to identify
panelboards and clearly indicate circuit number and description of the load.
Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5 mm thick, fully weatherproofed (IP
54), without knockouts, but with removable sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.

6.1.2.2.3 BUSBARS

6.1.2.2.3.1 Type
One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on the total maximum operating temperature of 90 deg C at any
point of the bus, at the full continuous rating. Bolted or clamped contact surfaces are to have a maximum current
density not exceeding requirements of the approved standards. Aluminium is not to be used for busbars or
panelboard parts.

6.1.2.2.3.2 Design
Busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch circuit devices can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size
without reduction. Busing and blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices.

6.1.2.2.3.3 Rating
Busbar rating is to be at least equal to main moulded case switch size.

6.1.2.2.3.4 Short-circuit Duty

Busbars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit level at point of application for one second,
without showing any signs of degradation.
Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type. Screws and bolts used for making
copper/copper connections are to be hard copper alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not
acceptable).
Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less box type set-screw connector is
to be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with
set-screw for the main incoming neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
The earthing bar is to be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure connector for the main
conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing conductor, to provide secure and reliable
contact with all metal parts and enclosure.

6.1.2.2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

6.1.2.2.4.1 Type
Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high temperature
resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within
enclosures at point of application, and provided with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for
manual operation of main contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole
breakers are to have a common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating is to be
clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set screws, suitable for copper or aluminium
conductors.

6.1.2.2.4.2 Circuit Breaker Trip Units

unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, molded case breakers of final branch circuit panelboards
Technical Specifications 6-21 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

(LPs) and power panelboards (PPs) are to be thermal magnetic type, while molded case circuit breakers of
distribution panelboards (SMDBs) are to be thermal magnetic for frame sizes up to 160A and electronic solid
state trip type for higher frame sizes.

6.1.2.2.4.3 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Units

Are to have bi-metallic inverse time delay overcurrent element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic
overcurrent trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers rated at
150/160 A frame sizes are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.

6.1.2.2.4.4 Compensation
Thermal overcurrent trips are to be ambient temperature compensated between 25 and 45 deg. C.

6.1.2.2.4.5 Electronic Trips Units

Are to be the solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time
delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous
protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes
in ambient temperature between –20 and +45 deg. C. Earth fault protection is to be built into the trip unit where
specified and is to be suitable for connection to the external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
on the cover for testing the trip unit.

6.1.2.2.4.6 Switching Mechanism

Quick-make, quick-break type, with the positive trip-free operation so that contacts cannot be held closed against
excess currents under manual or automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved
arc-quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is set to operate.

6.1.2.2.4.7 MCCBs for SMDBs Type 2

Comply with IEC60947-2 test sequences I, II, utilization category B, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit
breaking capacities (sequence II) to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard location, with
preferred ratings in accordance with following tables.

6.1.2.2.4.8 MCCBs for SMDB Type 1

Rated for maximum voltage of 600v A.C., 250 v D.C. and utilization category B (with an intended short time
withstand capability), and are to have rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence II) with suitably
selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard location
and schedules, with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the
circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit breaker rating plate.
Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which corresponds with its
maximum trip range listed below and which is to be related to minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting
ratings, based on fully rated interrupting duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as
specified.
Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified voltages and rated
frequency.

6.1.2.2.4.9 Tripped Position

When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating mechanism of the circuit breaker is to assume
an intermediate position clearly indicated by the handle between on and off positions.

6.1.2.2.4.10 Interchangeable Trips

Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers of 160 A frame size are to have interchangeable trip units.
Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit breakers with
interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.

6.1.2.2.4.11 Accessories
Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard attachments including shunt-trip, under-voltage
release, combined auxiliary and alarm switches, and electrical operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame
Technical Specifications 6-22 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

size) 100 A and over.

Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as an add-on or built-in earth leakage
accessories, where required and protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current and short-
circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Circuit breakers are to include a current
transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker cannot be
held closed against earth faults.

6.1.2.2.4.12 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Molded case type without fusible elements. When operating within current limiting range, the I2T of let-through
current is to be less than 1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with
breaker construction.
Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay over-current
characteristics for overload protection and an instantaneous trip for short-circuit protection. The operation of
main contacts is to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces between contacts created by fault current.
Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms value of prospective short-circuit current.

6.1.2.2.5 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898.
Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities (to IEC 60898) are to be as follows:
1. 6 - 100 A MCB: 6, 10, 16 or 25 kA at 240/415 v A.C.

6.1.2.2.5.1 Construction:
MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70 degrees C within panelboard
enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and are to be constructed from high quality, high temperature, moulded
insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and characteristics are to be submitted for temperatures above 40 deg C.
MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for mounting on a plug-in
system.

6.1.2.2.5.2 Operation
Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of insulated conductors. Under short-
circuit conditions, the magnetic trip is to operate at 7 - 10 times normal rated current (type 3 characteristic). The
magnetic operation is to be in the current limiting region and opening time is not to exceed 5 milliseconds.

6.1.2.2.5.3 Ratings
Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 and 100 A, calibrated at 40deg.c, available
as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40 deg C is not to exceed 1% per deg C and loading is not
to exceed 70% of circuit breaker rating.
Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on devices, or built-in and
integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA are to be
available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers.
Auxiliaries are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch, shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which
are to be modular additions to the circuit breakers.

6.1.2.2.6 MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)

Molded Case Switch: Non-automatic on/off switching device of equal construction to equivalent circuit breaker,
having no over-current or fault protective elements, but marked with maximum current withstand and voltage
rating is to be used as a main incomer for SMDB, LP, PP panel boards.

6.1.2.2.7 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (SMDB)

6.1.2.2.7.1 SMDB Type 1

Form 2b to IEC60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 1000V and a rated operational voltage of 750V
A.C., surface mounted to wall or free standing, with doors, suitable for ratings of main switch and busbars
ranging from 250 A to 1250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly
arranged for any selected combination of branch MCCBs ranging from 150 A to 1250 A frame size and short-
Technical Specifications 6-23 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

circuit interrupting ratings. Circuit breakers smaller than 250 A frame size, may be grouped on an integral sub-
assembly mounted to the main chassis.

6.1.2.2.7.2 SMDB Type 2

Form 2b to IEC60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 750V and a rated operational voltage of 440V
A.C., 240 V D.C. Panelboard is to be recessed or surface mounted type, complete with trim and door, adjustable
trim fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of main switch and busbars of 100 A, 225/250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire,
with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit breakers, 100 A or 150/160 A frame size for voltages up to 600 V A.C., and 100
A to 225 A frame size at 240 V A.C.
Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and minimum 2 mm thick for trim or trim and
door. Fronts are to be single or twin covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.
Interior of panelboard is to be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel chassis minimum 2 mm thick,
folded, flanged and reinforced, with busbars vertically arranged and mounted on moulded insulators.
Moulded insulators are to have a minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation grade of 3.5 kV for
one minute.
Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers) and bolted rigidly to
copper cross and centre bus connectors.
Metering instruments:
1. Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enamelled, square, metal cases for flush installation.
Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. The accuracy of instruments is to be within 2%
unless otherwise specified.
2. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with centre zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system
voltage, 90-degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
3. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
4. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with centre zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90-degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
5. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
6. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with a nominal current of plant
protected, short-circuit level and burden.

6.1.2.2.8 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS - GENERALLY

6.1.2.2.8.1 Arrangement
Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile and base, and one main switch. Single
and multi-pole circuit breakers or other devices are to occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and
split-bus arrangement or other devices is not to change regularity of standard box width.

6.1.2.2.8.2 Indoor Enclosure

Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum 1.5 mm thick for the front shield, trim and
door. Fixings for flush trim are to be adjustable to allow for misalignment between box and wall surface. Wiring
spaces (gutters) are to be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided where tap-off insulated split
connectors are required. Knockouts are to be provided in top or bottom of enclosures and are to provide a neat
and uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.

6.1.2.2.9 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB

6.1.2.2.9.1 Type
Rated insulation voltage rating of 600V and a rated operational voltage of 600V.

6.1.2.2.9.2 Internal Assembly

Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction, attached to the enclosure by four captive
screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with busbars in a horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in a
vertical arrangement for TPN panels. Assembly is to be complete with a neutral terminal block, earthing bar and
one-piece insulated phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for fixing by
tightening a single screw on the circuit breaker. Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying
Technical Specifications 6-24 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

maximum short-circuit current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the
Standards.
SPN type panelboards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltage, single-phase and neutral, with
MCBs on branch circuits, the main incoming will be (MCS) for isolation.
SPN type main switch is to be double-pole MCS.
Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with ICs
as required in Calculations.
TPN type panelboards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-phase and neutral,
with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole main incoming will be (MCs) for isolation.
Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with IC suitable to the short
circuit level at the point of application.

6.1.2.3 EXECUTION

6.1.2.3.1 INSTALLATION

6.1.2.3.1.1 Fixing Generally:

1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure
2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring supporting
members do not prevent flow of air
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.

6.1.2.3.1.2 Panelboard Interiors

Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have been completed.

6.1.2.3.1.3 Wiring Inside Panelboards

Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are
to be split and bolted type, fully insulated.
Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush-mounted cabinets flush with wall surface finish.

6.1.2.3.1.4 Protection
Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of waterproof compound prior to
installation.

6.1.2.3.1.5 Mounting Heights

Top of trim 1800 mm above the finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

6.1.2.3.1.6 Mounting
Plumb and rigid without distortion of the box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall
finish.

6.1.2.3.1.7 Circuit Directory

Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before
installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create a directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four empty conduits from panelboard into accessible
ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor
space or below slab not on grade.

6.1.2.3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified
in "Basic Electrical Materials and Requirements" specification.

Technical Specifications 6-25 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.2.3.2.1 Panelboard Nameplates

Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws.

6.1.2.3.3 CONNECTIONS
Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to the main electrical ground
bus.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.

6.1.2.3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

6.1.2.3.4.1 Generally
Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on panelboards after installation, to
verify compliance with the specifications and standards. Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify
insulation conditions by use of a megger.

6.1.2.3.4.2 Circuit Breakers

Tests are to include the operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check automatic operation of selected
circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current
for tripping circuit breaker as applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure
and report ambient temperature inside the enclosure.

6.1.2.3.4.3 Insulation Check Tests

Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and between phases and earth/cabinet, and between
neutral and earth. Record all readings, using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger
for equipment on systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
Routine tests on the site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all panelboards assembled
from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the works of the manufacturer.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
Testing
After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and
compliance with requirements.

6.1.2.3.5 FACTORY TEST

The Contractor shall be responsible for performing the panelboards factory test.
The panelboards factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and Engineer’s representatives’
team; the team will comprise three representatives per each mission, the mission could be to inspect one or more
equipment.
The contractor shall provide to the engineer a certified factory test report.

6.1.2.3.6 ADJUSTING
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.

6.1.2.3.7 CLEANING
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other
spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match
original finish.

6.1.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

6.1.3.1 GENERAL

Technical Specifications 6-26 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.3.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and signal cables,
termination, jointing and splicing.
Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section include the following:
1. Single core copper conductor/cables.
2. Multicore copper conductor/cables.
3. Fixtures wires.
4. Control and signal cables.
Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project are as follows:
1. For power distribution circuits.
2. For lighting circuits.
3. For appliance and equipment circuits.
4. For motor-branch circuits.
5. For signal and control circuits where not specifically required otherwise under other sections
of the specification.

6.1.3.1.2 SUBMITTALS

6.1.3.1.2.1 Technical Data

Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities, de-rating
factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
4. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications signed and certified by the manufacture
and the Contractor.
Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.

6.1.3.1.2.2 Shop and Construction Drawings

Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and branch
circuits, with an indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with final
conduit routing.
6. Cable sizing calculations.

6.1.3.1.2.3 Certificate of Origin

For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by manufacturer stating origin, date of
manufacture, composition, standards to which it complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply
with the test requirements of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications prior to work
commencing on site.

6.1.3.1.2.4 Field Test Reports

Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. All test reports are to be
provided with a distinctive number.

6.1.3.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

6.1.3.1.3.1 Installer Qualifications

Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice and terminate low-voltage cables.

Technical Specifications 6-27 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.3.1.3.2 Standards
Wires and cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved standards and are to bear the mark of
identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Wires and cables not having this identification
will be rejected.
Current carrying capacities of conductors are to determine in accordance with the Regulations for specified type
of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in specified type of insulation
unless warranted by special conditions and approved by Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.

6.1.3.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers, wound on factory reels.
Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc…
Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and
sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

6.1.3.1.5 COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by
Engineer.
Ensure that cable twists and crossings are avoided and sufficient bending radius is maintained as per regulations.

6.1.3.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.3.2.1 GENERALLY

6.1.3.2.1.1 Conductors
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders are to have copper conductors.
Cable conductors are to be stranded for sections 2.5 mm² and above, based on IEC 228 Class 2. Signal and
control cables are to have solid conductors unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded
conductors. Conductors of single-core cables 25-mm² and above are to be compacted. Multi-core cables 35-mm²
and above are to be the sectoral shape.
Conductor sizes are to be metric. and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with a crosssectional area smaller
than specified will not be accepted.
Building wiring insulation is to be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the Regulations and as
follows:
1. Neutral is to be Blue.
2. Protective earth is to be green or green/yellow striped.
3. Phase colors are to be (Brown – Black – Brown) or to local Regulations and Standards and
consistent throughout the installation.
Maintain color coding throughout the installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is not color-coded are
to have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-shrinkable sleeves.

6.1.3.2.1.2 Buried Cables

Cables buried directly in the ground are to be armored type, unless otherwise indicated in particular Sections of
the Specification or on the Drawings.

6.1.3.2.2 LV WIRES AND CABLES

6.1.3.2.2.1 Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires)

Unless otherwise specified, single conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper
conductors, compacted, generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), suitable for wet locations and for conductor temperature of 70 deg. C.
Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.

Technical Specifications 6-28 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.3.2.2.2 Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV)

To have annealed, copper conductors, compacted, insulated with PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), flame
retardant, moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid
up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with PVC. Armored cables are to have single layer of galvanized
steel wire armor with PVC over-sheath. Cables are to comply with IEC 502 and IEC 540.

6.1.3.2.2.3 Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV)

Single-core circular stranded, annealed copper conductors, compacted, insulated with flame retardant, moisture
and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 90
deg. C. and PVC over-sheath. Armored cables are to have taped bedding, single wire aluminum armor and PVC
over-sheath.

6.1.3.2.2.4 Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV)

Single core annealed copper conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C,
laid up and bedded with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and PVC over-
sheathed, color black. Armored cables are to have single layer of galvanized steel wire applied helically over
extruded PVC bedding (which may be an integral part of filling) and over-sheathed with PVC, color black. PVC
over-sheaths are to be type ST2 to IEC502.

6.1.3.2.2.5 Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables

600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted, insulated with extruded LSF material in compliance with BS
6724 for armored cables and BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in construction of LSF cables are to
be nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine and bromine). When material is tested in accordance with
BS 6425, Part 1 and IEC Publication 754, Part 1, the acidic gas evolved during combustion is to be less than
0.5%. When tested in accordance with BS 2782, method 141D or ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of
bedding and sheathing materials is not to be less than 30. Completed cable is to meet the requirements for tests
under fire conditions when tested in accordance with BS 4066, Part 1 and NMV 1.5 of BS 4066 Part 3. Cores
and cross-sectional area are to be as shown on the Drawings. Phases are to be color coded in conformity with the
Standards, and overall cable sheath is to be extruded black LSF material.
Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. is to be 300/500 V grade to BS 6500,
three or four core, with finely stranded copper wires, EPR insulated, twisted and Sheathed With
Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP) Compound And With Strengthening Cord.
Fire Resistance Cable to be used for emergency/ life safety lighting circuits and Fire Detection and alarm system:
Solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 (in sizes up to 4 mm²), cross linked damage
resistant insulation, laminated copper tape screen bonded to sheath and in contact with full size annealed copper
protective conductor. Cable is to be rated 300/500 V, It is to be certified to have passed IEC 60331 and IEC
60332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests and BS5839-1 for enhanced application area in addition to BS
7629-1 and BS6387 Category CWZ. Cables must be supported by a fixing (recommended by the manufacturer)
that can withstand the same fire conditions as the cable. Cable is to be Pirelli Cables type FP or other equal and
approved.
Fire Resistance Armored Cable: Plain annealed copper conductors to BS 6360, primary insulation of fire
resistant tape and secondary insulation of 90 deg. cross-linked insulation, extruded LSOH bedding compound
and galvanized steel wires and robust LSOH sheath. Cable is to be rated 600/1000 V, It is to be certified to have
passed IEC 60331 and IEC 60332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests BS6387 Category CWZ. Cable is to be
Pirelli Cables type FP or other equal and approved.
High Temperature Cable (125 deg. C) - TYPE SA: Single conductor, rated for maximum 600 V service, suitable
for special applications. Silicone rubber insulated with outer covering of asbestos, glass or other suitable braid
material.

6.1.3.2.3 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES

Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm², 2.5 mm² or stranded 4 mm² plain
circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to IEC 227 (PVC type 5 to BS 6746), rated for 85 deg. C,
of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores are to be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material, PVC
over-sheathed, to form compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and generally for control of
power and lighting systems. Armored cable is to have extruded PVC bedding which may be an integral part of
the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and over-sheath of PVC type ST2 to IEC 502, color black. Core
identification is to be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. over black insulation.

Technical Specifications 6-29 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, are to be generally 300 V rating, polyethylene
insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter), twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core
assembly is to be covered with binder tape, spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided
with drain wire and overall PVC sheath.
Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, are to be insulated for same
voltage grade.

6.1.3.2.4 CONNECTORS (LV POWER)

6.1.3.2.4.1 Connector - Type A-1

Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices on conductors 10 mm² and smaller. Connector
is to be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating
sleeves or phenolic insulating covers.

6.1.3.2.4.2 Connector - Type A-2

Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and splices on conductors 16 mm² and larger.
Connector is to be cast non-ferrous copper alloy applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws
and provided with phenolic insulating cover.

6.1.3.2.4.3 Connector - Type B-1

Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring. The connector is to be steel encased spring with
shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt, type Scotchlok brand, as manufactured by Minnesota Mining & Mfg.
Co. or other equal and approved.

6.1.3.3 EXECUTION

6.1.3.3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting the performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free of burrs and is dry
and clean.

6.1.3.3.2 INSTALLATION

6.1.3.3.2.1 General
Building wires and cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors and in conduit outdoors, unless
otherwise shown the Drawings.

6.1.3.3.2.2 Circuits
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring is to be run inside trunking or conduits,
D.C. wiring is to be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring, and emergency lighting and power circuits are to
be run in separate conduits from normal circuits.
Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as shown on the Model Panel
Board Schedule. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be balanced. Ensure that the lighting loads and
other loads are balanced with a difference of not more than 10% between the phases.
Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit and trunking indoors,
and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
Bunching of wires in raceways is to be in accordance with raceway filling factors permitted by the Regulations.
Lubricants are to be used for pulling wire or cable if the character of pull would otherwise damage conductors,
insulation or jacket. Lubricants are to be approved by the Engineer.
Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway.

Technical Specifications 6-30 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.3.3.2.3 Support
Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported at the upper end of risers and at
intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any stresses on conductors, where required.

6.1.3.3.2.4 Wiring at Outlets

Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.

6.1.3.3.2.5 Extra Length

At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through is to be left slack to allow inspection
and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250-mm extra
length for terminations.
Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or made only in boxes or cabinet
gutters.
Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on conductors 10 mm² or smaller,
Type A-2 for conductors 16 mm² and larger, and Type B-1 for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive color, selected as complementary to cable color coding
used in the project.

6.1.3.3.2.6 Terminations
Conductors of wires and cables up to 16mm² are to be tightly twisted and where possible doubled back before
being clamped with set screws. Where two or more wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to
be tightly twisted together before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be allowed to project
beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 16 mm² and larger are to terminate
in tunnel lugs with setscrew, or by using bolted or sweated compression connectors.

6.1.3.3.2.7 Tagging
Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of panelboards or distribution cabinets.
Tags are to identify cable or circuit number and conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.

6.1.3.3.2.8 Tagging
Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or ceiling junction box, each circuit
is to be tagged as a guide in making connections.

6.1.3.3.2.8.1 Cable support

The Contractor shall supply and install all the supports, racks, trays, cleats, saddles, clips and other parts required
to carry and secure the cables, without risk or damage, in a neat and orderly manner. The spacing of all supports,
racks, cleats, saddles and clips shall be agreed by the Engineer. No cable shall be laid on the trench floor. They
shall be run in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall be avoided as far as
possible. Where cable runs unavoidably cross a suitable ramp shall be provided so that the runs do not touch.
The installation of all such items shall ensure freedom from rough edges, burrs and sharp corners, and the
materials used for the construction and fixing thereof shall be approved by the Engineer. No materials shall be
supplied which will promote electrolytic or other corrosive action in contact either between the various parts, or
with the cable sheaths or the building surfaces and other materials with which they may make contact.
The cable supports required for installation with single core cables, forming a 3 phase circuit, shall be so
designed as to permit the cables to be laid flat touching or spaced, or in close trefoil or quadrature formation.
Metal cleats may be used for this purpose but in such cases approved insulation shall be provided between the
cable and the cleats.
Where single core cables in trefoil or quadrature formation are not secured in cleats, binders of approved
material and construction shall be fitted around the formation to prevent the cables separating under fault
conditions. The binders shall consist of a nonferrous strap secured around the cables by means of a bolted
connection. The spacing of binders shall be approved by the Engineer. Single core and multicore cables shall be
clamped to the racks with smooth finish split packing pieces of non-inflammable material or cleats with bores of
the correct size for the cable diameters.
The design of cable support for cables installed in air in cable tunnels, trenches, etc., shall consist of vertical steel
Technical Specifications 6-31 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

members spaced at approved intervals and secured to the walls, floors and ceilings as necessary by means of
bolts either cemented in position or expanded into cored holes. Each vertical support shall have bolted to it a
number of steel brackets spaced at the intervals and designed to support and retain trays constructed of
galvanized sheet steel of adequate section to carry the weight of the cables, plus space for an additional quantity
of future cables not less than 25 percent by weight and dimensions in excess of the cables installed under this
Contract and an additional load of 100 kg at the extremity without distortion. The trays shall be designed with
raised edges to retain the cables and shall incorporate an interlocking feature so as to prevent movement between
supports. Solid sheet steel trays shall have drainage holes and shall be drilled to accommodate cable cleats at an
agreed spacing to support single core cables in the desired formation.
The design of support for situations where trays are not required shall in general consist of a metal rack within
which is contained one or more pairs of cleats shaped to suit the formation of the cables. Cable cleats shall be of
an approved non-corrosive material having no deleterious effect on cable coverings or supporting steelwork.
Aluminium or aluminium alloy cleats shall not be used. Cleats for carrying a single core cable shall be non-
magnetic and the arrangement shall not permit any closed magnetic circuit around the cable.
In mechanical and electrical rooms cables shall be protected against mechanical damage up to 1.5 m from floor.
The steel used in construction of cable supports shall be hot-dip galvanized and further provided with anti-
corrosive outer paint finish in areas such as trenches, manholes, basements, etc. where dampness is likely to be
present.
The design and construction of all cable cleating and supporting arrangements shall suit the cable system design.
The spacing of cable supports shall be approved by the Engineer.
Cables run on trays shall be neatly dressed and where not provided with cleats shall be secured by heavy gauge,
type approved metal reinforced, clips or saddles. Not more than 6 cables shall be embraced by one clip and not
more than 2 layers of cables run on 1 tray. Care shall be exercised to ensure a "Reduced Fire Propagation"
installation.
Every cable shall be supported at a point not more than 500 mm from its termination.
In general a clear spacing of 1 D shall be provided between cables, where D is the outer diameter of the larger
cable.
Cable bends shall have a bending radius of not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the cable.
Where cables are laid through ducts, they shall be clearly identified using stainless steel labels at all manholes.

6.1.3.3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)

Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to steel racks or cable
trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be installed in steel conduits. Cables in cable trenches are to be
laid on cable ladders.

6.1.3.3.3.1 Fixing
Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be fixed directly to walls or ceilings but
must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they are to be fixed on hot dip galvanized steel
perforated trays or on other approved special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.

6.1.3.3.3.2 Clamps
Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved galvanized cast steel clamps (or molded
plastic clamps for single core cables) are to be used at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables are to be supplied in lengths sufficient for
straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.
Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be laid in heavy duty PVC duct
banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in masonry or in floor finishing.
Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or asbestos cement pipe. If
steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and protective earth circuits are to be in the same
conduit.

6.1.3.3.3.3 Exposure to Heat

Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to corrosive agents. If such condition is

Technical Specifications 6-32 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

unavoidable, cables are to be type designed for particular condition.

Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections. Insulating cover is to be
purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level equal to that of conductor insulation.
Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables are to be purpose made and suitable for rigid mounting to
equipment enclosure.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material.
Identify wires and cables according to "Basic Electrical Materials and Requirements” specification.

6.1.3.3.4 CONNECTIONS
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths are available. Where a
joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or manholes. All cable entries into equipment are to
be provided with cable glands. Only one cable shall enter through one aperture of any equipment/device.

6.1.3.3.4.1 Recommendations
Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in accordance with cable manufacturer's
recommendations, and made with correct specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones,
glands and bonds as applicable.

6.1.3.3.4.2 Jointing
Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable manufacturer's recommendations.
Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-joints are to be submitted prior to commencing work on
the site. Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for test and
inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent damage to insulation in
general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit or equal approved.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturers
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with international standards.

6.1.3.3.5 FACTORY TEST

The Contractor shall be responsible for performing the LV cable factory test.
The LV cable factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and Engineer’s representatives’
team; the team will comprise three representatives per each mission, the mission could be to inspect one or more
equipment.
The contractor shall provide to the engineer a certified factory test report.

6.1.3.3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and Standards.

6.1.3.3.6.1 Test Equipment

Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test equipment as necessary for testing MV
installations. Use 500 V megger on installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on
installations with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V.
Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations is to be carried out in accordance with IEE
Regulations 613-5 through 613-8 and 713-04.
Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for PE insulated cables
and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core and core-earth, in accordance with the
Regulations.
Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohmmeter to determine insulation
resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

Technical Specifications 6-33 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

6.1.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

6.1.4.1 GENERAL

6.1.4.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

6.1.4.1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage
electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.
Related Sections include the following:
 "Basic Electrical Materials and Requirements".
 "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures"

6.1.4.1.3 SUBMITTALS

6.1.4.1.3.1 Technical Data

Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
 Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities, de-rating
factors for grouping and temperature.
 Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
 Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
 Joints and terminations.
Samples of each cable and, if requested by the Engineer, other accessories.

6.1.4.1.3.2 Shop and Construction Drawings

Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
 Exact routing layouts, showing coordination between various trades.
 Details of supports and fixings for trays and cables.
 Details of connections to transformers, switchgear, etc.
 Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.

6.1.4.1.3.3 Certificate of Origin

For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by manufacturer stating origin, date of
manufacture, composition, Standards to which it complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to
comply with the test requirements of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.

6.1.4.1.3.4 Cable Jointing Qualifications

Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications prior to work commencing on site.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables and accessories certifying that the products
furnished comply with requirements.

6.1.4.1.3.5 Qualification Data

For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

Technical Specifications 6-34 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.4.1.3.6 Product Test Reports

Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current
products.

6.1.4.1.3.7 Maintenance Data

For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance manuals.
 Include periodic tests of cables in service.

6.1.4.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice, and terminate
medium-voltage cable.
Standards: Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards, and are to bear the mark of
identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Cables not having this identification will be
rejected.
Current carrying capacities of conductors are to be determined in accordance with the Regulations for
specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in specified
type of insulation unless warranted by special conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various
loads and current carrying capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to
Engineer.

6.1.4.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels complying with applicable Standard.
Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather, fumes, water, debris,
etc.

6.1.4.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.4.2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following or approved equal:
 CABLES
 B.I.C.C. (England)
 Pirelli General (England)
 Siemens (Germany)
 Cables Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:
 B.I.C.C. (England)
 Raychom Corp. (USA)
 3M (USA)
 Pirelli General (England)

6.1.4.2.2 18/30 kV MV CABLE

Three Core MV Cable 18/30 (36) kV, XLPE insulated, for use on system voltage 33 kV is to comply with
IEC 60502, and have the following characteristics:
 Conductor: Copper, circular, stranded and compacted.
 Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
 Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 8 mm thick.
 Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting material,
readily strippable.
 Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.
Technical Specifications 6-35 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

 Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact circular
bedding.
 Armor: Single layer of round galvanized steel wire.
 Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
 Embossing: "Electric cable 30000 V".
 Short-circuit: 10.1 kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 70 mm2, 13.6 kA (Minimum) for
one second rating for 95 mm2, 17.2kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 120 mm2, 21.5
kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 150 mm2, 26.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating
for 185 mm2 cables, 34.4 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 240 mm2 cables, and 42.9
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
Single core MV cable 18/30 (36 kV), XLPE insulated for use on system voltage 33 kV, is to comply with
IEC 60502, and have the following characteristics:
 Conductor: copper, circular, stranded and compacted.
 Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
 Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 8 mm thick.
 Copper Screen: Layer of copper wires with copper tape applied in opposite direction bedding.
Inner tape covering and separation sheath of extruded PVC.
 Over-sheath extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
 Short-circuit: 10.1 kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 70 mm2, 13.6 kA (Minimum) for
one second rating for 95 mm2, 17.2kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 120 mm2, 21.5
kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 150 mm2, 26.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating
for 185 mm2 cables, 34.4 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 240 mm2 cables, and 42.9
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of aluminum wire or two
layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
Cable joints to be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in characteristics, in
terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials and methods of jointing are to be
approved before confirmation of order.

6.1.4.2.3 8.7/15 kV MV CABLE

Three Core MV Cable 8.7/15 kV (11) kV, XLPE insulated, for use on system voltage 11 KV, is to comply
with IEC 60502, and have the following characteristics:
 Conductor: Copper, circular, stranded and compacted.
 Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
 Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 2.5 mm thick.
 Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting material,
readily strippable.
 Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.
 Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact circular
bedding.
 Armor: Single layer of round galvanized steel wire.
 Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
 Embossing: "Electric cable 6000 V".
 Short-circuit: 10.1 kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 70 mm2, 13.6 kA (Minimum) for
one second rating for 95 mm2, 17.2kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 120 mm2, 21.5
kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 150 mm2, 26.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating
for 185 mm2 cables, 34.4 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 240 mm2 cables, and 42.9

Technical Specifications 6-36 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.

Single core MV cable 8.7/15 kV (11) kV, XLPE insulated for use on system voltage 11 KV, is to comply
with IEC 60502, and have the following characteristics:
 Conductor: copper, circular, stranded and compacted.
 Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
 Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 2.5 mm thick.
 Copper Screen: Layer of copper wires with copper tape applied in opposite direction bedding.
Inner tape covering and separation sheath of extruded PVC.
 Over-sheath extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 502.
 Short-circuit: 10.1 kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 70 mm2, 13.6 kA (Minimum) for
one second rating for 95 mm2, 17.2kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 120 mm2, 21.5
kA (Minimum) for one second rating for 150 mm2, 26.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating
for 185 mm2 cables, 34.4 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 240 mm2 cables, and 42.9
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of aluminum wire or two
layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
Cable joints to be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in characteristics, in
terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials and methods of jointing are to be
approved before confirmation of order.

6.1.4.2.4 SPLICING AND TERMINATING PRODUCTS

6.1.4.2.4.1 Types
Compatible with the cable materials and equipment terminations specified under respective equipment
sections of this specification. Approval by the Engineer for each particular type is required before ordering
materials.
Connectors compression type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application.
Splicing and Terminating Kits as recommended by the manufacturer in writing for the specific sizes,
ratings, and configurations of cable conductor, splices, and terminations specified. Kits shall contain all
components required for a complete splice or termination including detailed instructions and shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. Completed splices and terminations shall provide insulation equivalent to
the insulation class of the cable it connects, as well as protection.
Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals designed to seal the end of multiconductor cable against moisture
where the sheath ends at a cable terminations. Seal shall be of the type recommended by the seal
manufacturer for the specific type of cable and installation and conditions of use, including orientation of
the device (upright, horizontal, or inverted) where this affects selection. Seal fittings for armoured cable
shall include provision for earthing the metal cable armor.

6.1.4.3 EXECUTION

6.1.4.3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine raceways to receive medium-voltage cables for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cables. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

6.1.4.3.2 INSTALLATION
Refer to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for feeder and sub-feeder cable installation
requirements applicable to this Section.
Install cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6.1.4.3.2.1 Pull Conductors

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not

Technical Specifications 6-37 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions
and sidewall pressure values.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.
Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Requirements."
Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 100-mm bed of clean sand at bottom of trench. Separate
cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a minimum of 100 mm of tamped earth. Install
permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.
Install "buried cable" warning tape 300 mm above cables.
In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the
longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.
Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material according to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Requirements."

6.1.4.3.3 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING

Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths are available.
Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or manholes.

6.1.4.3.3.1 Recommendations
Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in accordance with cable manufacturer's
recommendations, and made with correct specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress
cones, glands and bonds as applicable.

6.1.4.3.3.2 Jointing
Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to Engineer prior to work commencing on site. Joints are to
be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable manufacturer's recommendations. Sample
site constructed cable terminations and through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to
commencing work on site. Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be
available for test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent damage to insulation in
general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit or equal approved.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturers
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with international standards.

6.1.4.3.4 FACTORY TEST

The Contractor shall be responsible for performing the MV cable factory test.
The MV cable factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and Engineer’s
representatives’ team; the team will comprise three representatives per each mission, the mission could be
to inspect one or more equipment.
The contractor shall provide to the engineer a certified factory test report.

6.1.4.3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and Standards

6.1.4.3.5.1 Test Equipment

Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test equipment as necessary for testing MV
installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V and V

Technical Specifications 6-38 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

megger for (24 kV) for initial checks.

6.1.4.3.5.2 Testing
On installation of medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
 MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere range sufficient
to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct bank), jointed where
applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment and clear of ground.
 MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and the screen in
steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the A.C. rms rated voltage of the
cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test voltage. At each step, and for the last
5-15 minutes duration at maximum test voltage, the ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to
be monitored closely and recorded. If, except as voltage is increased, the current starts to
increase, test is to be stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
 MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C. test voltage
for grounded neutral system is to be 3 times rated A.C. rms voltage of cable.
 MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times
 A.C. rms rating of cable applied for 15 minutes and recorded every 5 minutes by an approved
A.C. test set. Readings are to be within same range and in accordance with IEC 60502.
Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.

6.1.4.3.6 PROTECTION
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to
prevent entrance of moisture into the cables and to ensure medium- voltage cables are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

6.1.5 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES

6.1.5.1 GENERAL

6.1.5.1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, pull boxes and handholes, manholes, and
other underground utility structures.

6.1.5.1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

6.1.5.1.2.1 Underground Ducts for Electrical, Ultra Low Voltage (ULV), Cables
Direct-buried PVC conduit and PVC encased in concrete at road crossings.

6.1.5.1.2.2 Manholes and Handholes

Cast-in-place concrete.

6.1.5.1.3 SUBMITTALS

6.1.5.1.3.1 Product Data

For metal accessories for manholes and handholes, conduits and ducts, duct-bank materials, and miscellaneous
components.

6.1.5.1.3.2 Shop Drawings

Show details and design calculations for precast manholes and handholes, including reinforcing steel. Include
Shop Drawings prepared by registered professional structural engineer, as indicated by the seal on Shop
Drawings.

Technical Specifications 6-39 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.5.1.3.3 Coordination Drawings

Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. Include plans and sections
drawn to scale.

6.1.5.1.3.4 Field Test Reports

Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

6.1.5.1.3.5 Record (as-Built) Documents

Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts, handholes, and manholes.

6.1.5.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with specified Standards.

6.1.5.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending,
warping and deforming.
Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent physical damage.
Arrange so identification markings are visible.
Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.

6.1.5.1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

6.1.5.1.6.1 Existing Utilities

Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated.
 Notify Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.

6.1.5.1.7 COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final arrangement of other utilities to
be to local regulations and standards with a minimum clearance of 500mm between MV and Low current ducts
for parallel runs and minimum of 300mm for crossing as determined in the field.
Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes with final profiles of
conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground obstructions. Revise locations and
elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and
handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

6.1.5.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.5.2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) DUCTS

6.1.5.2.1.1 PVC Ducts for Outdoor Power and Lighting Cable Installations
Non-sparking type, suitable for direct burial in the ground, minimum tensile strength 500 kg/cm², impact
strength 5 kg/cm², supplied in standard 6 m lengths, with one end of each length tapered.
1. Nominal Size: As shown on Drawings.
2. Minimum Wall Thickness: 3.2 mm for 100-mm ducts; 4.7 mm for 150-mm ducts.

6.1.5.2.1.2 Duct Supports

Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover depths indicated while
supporting ducts during concreting.

6.1.5.2.1.3 Duct Sealing Compound

Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as

Technical Specifications 6-40 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

low as 1 deg C. Capable of withstanding temperature of 149 deg C without slump and of adhering to clean
surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable
jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

6.1.5.2.2 COVERS FOR MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

6.1.5.2.2.1 Frames and Covers

BS 497, checkered cast iron or cast steel, recessed type, and of suitable duty for the particular application as
required and/or shown on drawings. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces
 Covers: Cast-in legend "LV" or “ULV” as appropriate.

6.1.5.2.3 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

6.1.5.2.3.1 Concrete
Comply with "Cast-in-Place Concrete" specification for concrete and reinforcement.

6.1.5.2.3.2 Concrete-Envelope
For duct banks for power distribution systems and outdoor lighting cable installations crossing water, gas and
sewage mains, under roadways and where required or shown on the Drawings, is to be 21 MPa, 28-day,
compressive-strength reinforced concrete using sulfate-resisting Portland cement. Reinforcement is to consist of
12-mm diameter longitudinal bars at approximately 300-mm centres along bottom and sides of duct bank with
10-mm diameter U-shaped transversal bars at 400-mm centres. Extend concrete envelope at least 300 mm
beyond each side of the crossing, etc.

6.1.5.2.3.3 Cable Manholes and Handholes

21 MPa, 28-day, compressive strength reinforced concrete using sulfate-resisting Portland cement, with
approved waterproof membrane on external surfaces, and with cable supports where necessary, pull-eyes, and
drain pit and drain pipe as required. Dimensions and reinforcement are to be as shown on the Drawings or in
accordance with approved standard details shown on shop and construction drawings.

6.1.5.2.4 PULL BOXES

6.1.5.2.4.1 Cast-Metal Boxes

Cast aluminium, sized as indicated, with outside flanges and recessed, gasketed cover for flush mounting.
Nonskid finish on cover.

6.1.5.2.4.2 Fibreglass Boxes

Molded fiberglass, sized as indicated, with 150-mm square cable entrance at each side and weatherproof cover
with the nonskid finish.
Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC."

6.1.5.3 EXECUTION

6.1.5.3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting the performance of underground ducts and
utility structures. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

6.1.5.3.2 EARTHWORK

6.1.5.3.2.1 Trenches
Width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots
from trench bottom and trim level. Inform the Engineer in advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect
trench for each section of the work.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and re-establish original grades, unless otherwise
indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

Technical Specifications 6-41 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and
include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.

6.1.5.3.3 DIRECTLY BURIED PVC CABLE DUCTS

Lay and join ducts to required line and level on the sand bed, cover with sand and backfill trench to ground level
with excavated soil, free from stones and other debris, well compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick.
Lay approved concrete tiles to fully cover cable duct, extending minimum 50 mm beyond sides of the duct and
placed 300 mm below ground level.
Provide warning tape or galvanized steel mesh along duct runs at a depth 200 mm below ground level.

6.1.5.3.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT ASSEMBLIES

Install duct as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced to prevent sagging of ducts and
breaking of couplings and watertight seals, and secured with cords (not tie wires) where necessary.

6.1.5.3.4.1 Slope
Pitch ducts a minimum of 1:300 to drain toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and
equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.
Join ducts using waterproof cement, to manufacturer's recommendations, to give waterproof and sand-proof joint
with at least 80 mm overlap.
Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling of cables, extending 1 m beyond duct
banks at both ends and securely fixed to wooden bungs sealing the duct.

6.1.5.3.4.2 Concrete-Encased Ducts

Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required duct spacing, and install according to the
following:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of
ducts, and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not
use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct
groups.
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between
conduits and at the exterior surface of the envelope. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment
unless specifically designed for the duct-bank application. Pour each run of the envelope between
manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. When more than 1 pour is necessary,
terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 19-mm reinforcing rod dowels extending 450 mm
into the concrete on both sides of joint near the corners of the envelope.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed-earth and where indicated.
4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the soil is
self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.
5. Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 75 mm between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 50
mm between ducts for like services, and 100 mm between power and signal ducts.

6.1.5.3.4.3 Sealing
Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use
sealing compound and plugs.

6.1.5.3.5 ENDS OF DUCTS

Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and set behind chamfered precast
concrete duct end blocks or terminated with appropriate bell-mouth bushing set in the concrete wall. Ducts not
ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be properly capped.

6.1.5.3.5.1 Sealing Ends Of Ducts

Completely seal conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into buildings or manholes, with approved plastic
moulds or wooden bungs to prevent entry of rodents, gas and vapor.

Technical Specifications 6-42 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.5.3.6 SLEEVES OR DUCTS IN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS

Provide sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations, whether or not shown on Drawings, in accordance with
approved shop and construction drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Obtain approval of sleeve or duct
installation prior to pouring concrete.

6.1.5.3.7 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION

6.1.5.3.7.1 Drainage
Install drains in the bottom of units. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

6.1.5.3.7.2 Waterproofing
Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after the concrete has cured at least 3 days. Apply APP
Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before
backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. The waterproof exterior of
manhole and handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.

6.1.5.3.7.3 Dampproofing
Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after the concrete has cured at least 3 days. After ducts have
been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions
and scars. The dampproof exterior of manhole and handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3
days.
Cast-in-Place, Underground Structure Installation: Comply with applicable requirements of "Cast-in-Place
Concrete." Specification.
 Finish interior surfaces with a smooth troweled finish.

6.1.5.3.7.4 Precast Concrete, Underground Structure Installation

Install as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
 Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts
to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

6.1.5.3.8 SUPPORTS
Support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel graded from the 25-mm sieve to the 4.75-mm sieve and
compacted to the same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

6.1.5.3.8.1 Inspection of Duct Systems

Inspect directly buried ducts and underground duct assemblies in the presence of the Engineer, before backfilling
or concreting. Steel mandrel or other approved device, a diameter equal to 90% of inside diameter of the duct
and 500 mm long, is to be pulled through the entire run of the duct and is to pass through without getting stuck.
Ducts, which do not allow the mandrel to be pulled through, are to be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

6.1.5.3.8.2 Testing
Demonstrate capability and compliance with the requirements for the completion of the installation of
underground ducts and utility structures.
Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective
products and retest.

6.1.5.3.9 CLEANING
Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in cables. Pull brush through the full
length of ducts. Use a round-bristle brush with a diameter 12 mm larger than the ID of the duct.
Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

6.1.6 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

6.1.6.1 GENERAL

Technical Specifications 6-43 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract apply to this Section.

6.1.6.1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, poles/support structures and
accessories and related power distribution and control, protective earthing and related builder's work including
column foundations, cable pits, cable trenches and ductwork.
The luminance and illuminance levels of the roadways are the initial average level which shall be calculated and
substantiated by measurements of the Contractor, after 100 hours of operation. The Contractor shall specify the
anticipated lamp lumen and luminaire dirt depreciation factors after two years of operation recommended by the
manufacturers, to assist the Engineer in assessing the maintained lighting levels of the installation.
The luminance and illuminance levels and uniformities shall be calculated by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall include for the luminaires manufacturer to carry out the final setting of all lights after site erection to ensure
maximum utilization of light output.
Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall be required to carry out measurements of the lighting
levels on site and to submit the results as proof that the approved calculated levels and uniformities have been
achieved.
The Contractor shall select fixtures generally similar to CIE classification.
Luminaires shall be of the cut-off type of distribution.
The luminaires shall be of purpose built design incorporating the specified size and type of lamps.
The light distribution characteristics of the luminaire as mounted shall be better than:
 The direction of Maximum intensity 0 - 67 degrees.
 The maximum permissible value of intensity at: 90 degrees from nadir 25 cd/1000 lumens. 80
degrees from nadir 100 cd/1000 lumens.

6.1.6.1.3 DEFINITIONS

6.1.6.1.3.1 Lighting Unit

A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support, including pole, post, or other
structure, and mounting and support accessories.

6.1.6.1.3.2 Luminaire (Light Fixture)

A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when applicable, together with parts designed to
distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to the power supply.

6.1.6.1.4 SUBMITTALS

6.1.6.1.4.1 Equipment Data

For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and control gear
including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions,
operating characteristics and principles, and any modification to a standard product if applicable
2. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape, base/mounting
flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions
for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker etc.
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of utilization,
efficiency and depreciation factors.
4. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
5. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric
data.
6. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.
7. Luminaire ballasts.

Technical Specifications 6-44 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.1.4.2 Shop and Construction Drawings

Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. The layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details, concrete
foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of ductbanks and trenches, backfill
and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution, protection and
control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.
4. Construction details, standards to which feeder pillars comply, current carrying capacities of
bus bars, derating factors employed for breakers and busbars
5. External dimensions of feeder pillar, details of base foundation glands, joints, etc…

6.1.6.1.4.3 Samples
Submit a fully equipped sample of a luminaire or other materials or components if required by Engineer.

6.1.6.1.4.4 Product Certificates

Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products comply with requirements.

6.1.6.1.4.5 Field Test Reports

Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

6.1.6.1.4.6 Maintenance Data

For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

6.1.6.1.4.7 As-Built Drawings

At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed lighting, in accordance with requirements of the
specification, Division 1.

6.1.6.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

6.1.6.1.5.1 Standards
Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 598 and the applicable CISPR recommendations. The
manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the applicable local regulations and design
standards.

6.1.6.1.5.2 Standards
Carry out work in accordance local code in addition to the following:
th
1. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations 16 Edition).
2. BS 7430: Code of Practice for Earthing.

6.1.6.1.5.3 Technical Requirements

Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for improvement in construction details, but no changes
are to be made without the written approval of the Engineer. The lighting control gear manufacturer, the lamp
manufacturer and the luminaires manufacturer shall cross certify that their proposed product are suitable for
operation and compatible.

6.1.6.1.5.4 Ambient Conditions

Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble-free service at 42
deg. C ambient temperature and 100% relative humidity, with the temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct
sunlight and with a high content of ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst
exposed to the sun.
All lighting fixtures to have test certification from approved, photometric laboratories.
All luminaries shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or from manufacturer authorized
dealer/agent, with documentation as necessary.

Technical Specifications 6-45 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation. Support poles to
prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric
straps.

6.1.6.1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole unit) of installed
quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers, special bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the
like which are subject to burning, breakage or failure.
Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1% of each type and rating
installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 5% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
5. Lighting Fixtures: 10 % of each type installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

6.1.6.2 PRODUCTS

6.1.6.2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in
the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on plans or any other approved equal.

6.1.6.2.2 LIGHTING COLUMNS

6.1.6.2.2.1 Construction
Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically welded, and of height specified.
Columns up to 12-m height are to be one piece section. Columns above 12 m and up to 20-m height may be
supplied in two piece sections, of the slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of
column after assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is to have
minimum rupturing resistance of 37 kg/mm² and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm².
Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other arrangement required,
supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings. Bracket arrangement is to be designed to ensure that
failure, due to wind induced oscillations, does not occur and that rotation from desired alignment is not possible.

6.1.6.2.2.2 Column Design

Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to be designed to withstand gust wind
velocity of 140 km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with
column fully equipped. Fatigue of steel is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic
stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly welded onto lower edge of
column as shown on the Drawings, and is to have specified number of holes for holding down bolts together
with central cable access hole not less than 150 mm diameter.
Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column base and is to be suitably sized to insert
and service the supply cable terminations and protective device. Door is to be flush fitting with retaining
mechanism and positive locking arrangement with removable hexagonal key. Column is to be reinforced at door
opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to accept appropriate equipment is to
be fixed to inside of column by purpose-made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to
be welded inside the column near the access door.

6.1.6.2.2.3 Finish
Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and outside surfaces of column are to be cleaned by
pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel components of columns to be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column.
Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91 121 or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during erection by

Technical Specifications 6-46 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust converter to the satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate
and inside and outside of column base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.

6.1.6.2.2.4 Protection and Wiring

Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected to one phase and neutral. Columns with three or more
luminaires are to be connected to 3 phases and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted
terminals and cable lugs are to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 3
phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings. One circuit breaker, single pole 6 A is to be provided
for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient
with interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA, and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at baseboard.
Wiring is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm²
copper conductor.

6.1.6.2.3 HIGH MASTS

This work shall consist of supplying and installing new high masts and the installation of foundations,
connection, commissioning for the system. The works shall include for putting into satisfactory service the high
masts complete with operating mechanisms, luminaire support ring or bracket, luminaires, control gear, wiring
and distribution equipment. Prepared foundations are specified in other sections of this specification.
Provide high masts complete with lifting/lowering mechanism, luminaire ring, etc. and install as shown on the
drawings.
The contractor shall fix the high masts on prepared foundations, aligned properly. The system shall be in fully
operational conditions to suit the ICAO requirements for the lighting of the Apron. Warning lights are to be
provided on top of the high masts. Control gear panel is to be provided within the high mast for power
distribution to the different floodlights.

6.1.6.2.3.1 General
The luminaires shall be mounted on the luminaire ring by means of a specially designed bracket allowing it to be
swiveled in any desired direction. It shall be possible to lock it firmly in its position, thus preventing any
rotation or falling while moving the luminaire ring.
The head frame shall be covered by a shaped protective aesthetic canopy designed to give a coordinated
appearance of head frame with the luminaire ring.
For masts fitted with a mobile luminaire ring, rollers with a centering mechanism shall be provided to ensure a
perfect alignment of the luminaire ring both axially and in azimuth, while ascending or descending the mast.
Rollers shall be made of water resistant non-marking composition material with oil-impregnated bronze
brushings. All shafts and washers shall be stainless steel.
A weatherproof wiring chamber shall be provided and installed on the luminaire ring and shall be equipped with
the proper terminal blocks and neutral bar and shall include facilities on the luminaire ring to allow testing of
luminaires while in the lowered position. The wiring chamber shall be fitted with an earthing stud accessible
from inside and out for earthing connections.
The cable connecting the MCB assembly at the base of the mast to the wiring chamber on the luminaire ring,
shall be flexible multicore copper conductors cable with neoprene or approved equivalent high temperature
resistant insulation and sheath in accordance with BS 6977 or IEC 277-6.
For mobile luminaire rings a multi-pin type plug and socket shall be fitted in the flexible cable adjacent to the
power control and distribution unit housing in the base, for disconnection of the rising cable.
Color coding of the different phases shall conform to the standards. Each luminaire shall have its own neutral
conductor and earth conductor connected to the neutral bar and earth bar respectively.
The cables installed in the luminaire ring connecting each luminaire to the wiring chamber shall be factory pre-
wired avoiding the need for field wiring, and shall have single core Copper conductors with neoprene or cross-
linked polythene or approved equivalent insulation and sheath. Cables shall have 2.5 sq.mm Copper conductors
with colour coding of different phases being in conformity with the Standards.

6.1.6.2.3.2 High Mast Luminaire Ring

The luminaire ring shall suit the number of floodlights as per the drawings.
The high mast luminaire support ring or carriage shall be constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel channel

Technical Specifications 6-47 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

fitted with the appropriate number of luminaires, lamp gear mounting brackets, wiring chamber and mounting
plate. It shall be in two halves joined by bolted flanges to permit removal from the erected mast.
A steadying system shall keep the luminaire ring in the correct top position avoiding any rotation around its
vertical axis.
The luminaire ring shall be raised and lowered for installation and maintenance purposes by means of a winching
system specially designed to be installed and removed through the access door at the base of the mast.

6.1.6.2.3.3 Winching System

The capacity of the winching system against the floodlights is to be calculated and ensured.
The head frames shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel attached to the mast by means of a steel slip-fitter and
secured by at least four stainless steel set screws. They shall be composed of a spun aluminum or other approved
weatherproof cover, housing the required number of steel cable sheaves and associated accessories for the
operation and powering of the luminaire ring.
Pulleys shall be of non-corrosive material grooved to exactly suit the steel rope and cable diameter, and fitted
with stainless steel shafts. The pulleys shall be housed in a chassis integral with a sleeve which slopes over the
top of the mast and is secured axially and in azimuth. The complete chassis assembly shall be hot dipped
galvanized. Arrangements shall be provided to ensure that the electric and steel cables are separated before
passing over their respective pulleys, and close fitting guides shall ensure that the cables cannot disengage the
pulley during operations.
The luminaire ring shall be supported by 3 steel ropes coupled to 2 steel ropes and suspended from the double
drum winch by means of a manufactured steel coupling unit. A divider bar shall ensure the separation of the steel
ropes during raising and lowering.
Flexible stainless steel stranded wire ropes in accordance with BS 302 suitable for the application, with factor of
safety 5 times S.W.L. of the winch, shall support the luminaire ring assembly. Stops installed on the steel cable
shall support the luminaire ring assembly in extreme lower position to within 900mm above the base of the mast.
Provisions shall be made to prevent the power cable from winding around the steel hoisting ropes.
A multicore electrical power cable shall be provided terminating in the base compartment with a special multi-
pin plug and socket coupler fitted with a guard ring, and at the mast head connected to a wiring chamber fixed to
the luminaire ring.
A steadying system shall keep the luminaire ring in the correct top position avoiding any rotation around its
vertical axis.
The luminaire ring shall be raised and lowered for installation and maintenance purposes by means of a winching
system specially designed to be installed and removed through the access door at the base of the mast.
The winching system shall have a lifting capacity of at least double the weight of the luminaire ring assembly
and their maximum winding torque during operation shall be specified. The winching system shall employ
double drums as a safeguard against a single suspension steel wire rope failing.
Winches shall be capable of normal operation using a portable power tool which shall be a multispeed reversible
type incorporating torque limiting device which can be readily adjusted and locked in any adjustment. The power
tool shall be equipped so that the operator can be positioned clear of the moving head frame and using push-
button controls at the end of a 5m long flexible lead. A power unit mounting or support frame shall be provided
for locating and securing during operations.
Termination of winch cables shall not involve distortion or twisting of the cable structure. One full layer of turns
shall remain on the drum when the luminaire ring is fully lowered or alternatively the drums shall be grooved to
ensure a tidy cable lay.
Manually operated winches shall be provided with handles and shall incorporate a torque limiter which can be
readily adjusted and locked. Winches shall be completely selfsustaining without the need for brakes or clutches
which require adjustment or which can be affected by moisture or lubricant shall not be used.
Winch gear shall be totally enclosed and self-lubricating by means of an oil bath. Only lubricant recommended
by the supplier shall be used. The gear ratio shall take into account operational safety and speed.
An MCCB providing overload protection shall be incorporated to stop the luminaire ring when the effort
required by the winch becomes superior to the nominal load.
The winch shall be fitted with suitable equipment to allow the winch to stop in a safe manner, without damage to
Technical Specifications 6-48 Rev F – September 2019
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

the mast finish, in the event of a supply failure to the power tool. The winching mechanism should then be
capable of being operated by hand.

6.1.6.2.3.4 Finish
All welds shall be smooth with spatter remover and the interior and exterior surfaces of the mast and ring shall
be cleaned by pickling or blasting and shall be free of any grease.
All components shall be hot dipped galvanised by total immersion in a bath of molten zinc after completion of
the fabrication. No further leveling up, finishing or modifications shall be carried out after completion of the
galvanising process. The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 450g/m². On the inside and outside surfaces
of the mast and ring. The galvanising shall conform to BS 729: 1971.
Any damage to the galvanising shall be rectified during erection by wire brushing the affected area and treating
with an approved zinc restorative. Sufficient material shall be applied to provide a zinc coating at least equal in
thickness to the galvanised layer.
The flange plate and bottom of the pole to a height of 0.5 m shall be given an internal and external coating on all
surfaces of heavy-duty bitumen paint prior to erection.
High Mast Distribution Equipment: The high mast base compartment shall be fitted with a power control and
distribution assembly installed in a pre-wired weatherproof box opposite the access door inside the base of the
mast.
The assembly shall consist of a surface mounting sheet steel weatherproof box with a cover enclosing breakers
as shown on drawings.

6.1.6.2.3.5 High Mast Accessories

High masts shall be equipped with an air terminal of the correct height to provide the required zone of protection
for the mast head frame and fixtures.
The air terminal shall be bonded to the mast to ensure the discharge is dissipated via the earth and ground
terminal without damage to the steel winch ropes or electrical cables.
High masts are to be equipped with a red luminaire on top for aircrafts. Two lamps are to be provided per high
mast.
M. High mast approval: For the approval of the Engineer before installation commences the Contractor shall
submit detailed calculations and supporting data to show the mast meets the design criteria detailed and shall
include the following information:
 The deflection at the top of the mast at the designed wind speed.
 The neutral frequency of the mast.
 The critical wind speed for resonance.
 The damping characteristics of the mast.
 The steel stressed under resonant conditions.
 The acceleration at the top of the mast under resonant conditions.
 Welding procedure.
 Procedure to ensuring that the flange plate is not laminated.
 Details of the joints between the mast sections and between the bottom section and the flange.
 Details of the base compartment with the method of reinforcement at the door area and means
adopted for making the door weather and tamperproof.

6.1.6.2.3.6 Luminaires
Shall be complete with wiring, control gear and lamps as specified under the relevant item of this specification.

6.1.6.2.4 FLOODLIGHTS

Technical Specifications 6-49 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.2.4.1 Type
Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 65 of IEC 529 with aiming adjustment facility, and
glare control as per ICAO recommendations.

6.1.6.2.4.2 Housing
High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy, closed on front by hinged framed protector highly resistant to thermal
and mechanical shocks, and set in position by at least eight heavy duty stainless steel spring clamps with silicon
sealing gasket. Enclosure is to be in accordance with IEC Publication 598-2-5 and BS 4533-102.5, and is to be
suitable for operation in an ambient temperature of 70 deg. C.
Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision aligned internal tracks
to provide beam distribution required.
Connection box is to be located at rear of floodlight body with gland connections to accept 4 mm² PVC/PVC
three core cable. Lamp and control gear to be mounted in two separate and isolated compartments.

6.1.6.2.4.3 Control Gear

Plug-in type, 220 Voltage V, 50 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging. Ballasts and ignitors are to
be type specially adapted for make of lamps selected. Ignitors are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp is to be
able to start with at least +/-10% line voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds.
Compensation is to ensure that there is no large increase in operating current during starting. Control gear losses
are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in control gear compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm²
copper conductors with high temperature insulation and sheath. Control gear shall be suitable for operating at
+50 deg. C.

6.1.6.2.4.4 Finish
Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with corrosion and heat resistant paint, resisting operating
temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is burning.

6.1.6.2.4.5 Mounting
Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and mounted on specially designed brackets to allow
swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly in final position. Protractor scale is to be provided for
accurate setting.

6.1.6.2.4.6 Earthing Terminals

Bolted earthing terminal is to be provided in each fitting.
Provide lighting fixtures (flood lights) to be supplied and installed on high masts including control gear as shown
on drawings. Utilize aiming points of flood lights to comply with the requirements of Navigational Aids for
airplanes as recommended by ICAO (Industrial Civil Aviation Organization).
Metal halide lamps on each high mast are to be provided with instant restrike ignitors for quick restoration of
light after a power. The manufacturer is to submit details of the ballast and ignitor for approval.
Wherever required, antiglare louvers are to be provided to avoid glare to Aircrafts
The luminaires shall be mounted at the edge of the high mast ring. The angle of luminaire inclination shall be in
accordance with the design requirements. The luminaires shall be set at 90 degrees to the longitudinal axis.

6.1.6.2.5 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES

LED lighting fixtures for outdoor usage shall have metal body with heat tempered prismatic glass cover, fixed
with stainless steel toggles /clamps and IP 65 rated.
Fixtures shall have white powder coated paint finish, certified suitable for the outdoor weather conditions of the
project.
They shall be provided with heat resistant, non-degradable rubber gaskets held firmly in place.

6.1.6.2.6 APRON LIGHTING CONTROL

The photo-electric controls shall consist of omnidirectional Cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality
employing solid state photo - variable conductance elements giving a 2:1 On/Off ratio with sensitivity to switch
on lights when the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux. This allows for the high-pressure Sodium lights

Technical Specifications 6-50 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

striking time, taking account of the rather fast rate of daylight intensity drop off in the region.
The cell shall be pole mounted at a height of three meters and fitted to the top of the feeder pillar. The timer is to
be of the solar type to be settable once throughout the year and to be set at definite periods for switching on and
off.

6.1.6.2.7 FEEDER PILLARS

Unless otherwise specified feeder pillars are to be of the totally enclosed, fully self contained, dustproof, weather
proof, vermin proof, and suitable for mounting indoors.
Cabinets to be reinforced free standing structure, manufactured from sheet steel of adequate thickness with
bolted reinforcement corner construction, and are to be of the dwarf type with a bolting down for mounting on a
pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables from below ground level on a duct
system.
Cabinets are to have two hinged lockable openings doors to provide full front access to the cabinet, which shall
be sized according to the equipment being installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be slanted and shall have a
water drip edges provided.
Feeder pillar is to be factory-built assemblies designed, manufactured and tested in compliance with IEC 439,
complete with all equipment and fittings incorporating molded case circuit breakers controlling the main supply
in and the outgoing circuits.
Feeder pillar shall have the following characteristics:
 Voltage : 1000 Volts
 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) : Four-pole equipped with overload and short circuit
trip mechanisms, in compliance with (IEC 947-2 sequence III), and rated as shown on the
drawings.
 Interrupting Capacity : to be rated to the short circuit level calculated at feeder pillar location
according to substation rating.
 Contactors : Triple-pole, inductive type, AC 3 type ratings as shown on the drawings and in
compliance with the specification.
Timers are to be electronic timer (Quartz) type. The timer shall be capable of operating without interruption in
case of power supply loss for at least 500 hrs.
Busbars are to be fully insulated, rated 1.25 the main incoming moulded case circuit breaker frame size at 50
degrees C.
Feeder pillar is to be equipped with three ammeters each fitted with maximum demand indicator with the
associated current transformers.
Voltmeter with selector switch and protection fuse.
KWH meter, current transformers and accessories with a glass window to be mounted on the feeder pillar
cabinet inside the special enclosure to Local Authority Specifications and approval.
Cabling within feeder pillar to be PVC/PVC single core 1000 Volt grade with Copper conductor and rated as
required taking into account manufacturers recommended temperature and "bunching" derating factors.
All internal wiring shall be suitably "laced' or clipped.
The L.V. panel circuits serving the street lighting shall be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be
photo-electric controlled by two photocells (mounted in parallel) with a timer connected in parallel with the
photocells. An over-ride facility shall be provided for maintenance.
Equipment, busbars, conductors within the pillar shall be fully insulated such that there are no exposed live parts
of connections.
Feeder pillar shall have 50 mm x 6 mm high conductivity Copper main earth bar for grounding purposes
complete with test link (see "earthing system").
A permanently fixed to the inside of the door there shall be a distribution diagram showing all circuit
connections, MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.
The feeder pillar shall be secured against unauthorized access by means of wedge locks protected by brass plugs

Technical Specifications 6-51 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

and operated by a special key.

The pillar final finish and final color shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
The feeder pillar is to be assembled by a licensed manufacturer.

6.1.6.2.7.1 Wiring
 Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with suitable
numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
 Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
 Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm² section, to the nearest earthing bar.
 Control wiring to be copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for
multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables are to be
used in proximity to higher temperature components and as a flexible cable.
 Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.

6.1.6.2.7.2 Miscellaneous
 Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be provided in the
switchboard, controlled by a thermostat and/or humidistat.
 Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.

6.1.6.3 EXECUTION

6.1.6.3.1 INSTALLATION

6.1.6.3.1.1 Equipment
Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the
Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no changes are to be made without the approval of Engineer.

6.1.6.3.1.2 Column Bases

Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before commencement of construction, ensure
that bases are suitable for column installation.
Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless steel or cadmium plated.

6.1.6.3.1.3 Columns
Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to the theoretical profile of road. Alignment of
columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be secured to the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set
at 90 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the road.
Install poles as follows:
 Use web fabric slings (not a chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
 Mount pole to the foundation with levelling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
 Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
 Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding concrete grout
firmly packed in entire void space.
Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through the grout. Arrange to drain condensation
from the interior of the pole.

6.1.6.3.1.4 Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming

Attach luminaires and supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.

Technical Specifications 6-52 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.6.3.1.5 Mounting Adjustments

After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting requirements have been met, carry out the final setting
and locking in position of the floodlights.

6.1.6.3.1.6 Luminaire Attachment

Fasten to indicated structural supports.
Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace malfunctioning
lamps.

6.1.6.3.1.7 Cabling Conduits and Ductwork

Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly
buried except at crossings with other service work or roads.
High Masts shall be installed on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. The erection of High Masts and the
assembly of the luminaire head frame with raising and lowering gear shall be carried out strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall before the commencement of the construction work
confirm that the foundations are suitable for use with the High Mast installation he proposes to install.
Holding down bolts and plumb adjustment nuts, washers, locknuts or nylon nuts shall be galvanized steel or
Cadmium plated.
Final setting and adjustment of the luminaires shall only be carried out after all the masts are complete and
operational.
Each High Mast metal work shall be bonded to a separate earth rod as indicated on the Drawings and also to the
separate earthing cable connected to the distribution system earth bar.
Mast shall be of specified height carrying luminaires as indicated on the Drawings. Each luminaire shall be fitted
with the specified lamp or lamps arranged to be separately oriented to give the correct illumination at designated
locations along the road surfaces.
The High mast system shall incorporate a purpose made a portable cage for maintenance purposes in addition to
the power tool system. The cage shall be obtained from the High Mast supplier and shall be capable of carrying
two persons plus servicing equipment. A safety device shall be provided for use with the cage.
A portable power tool shall be provided as necessary for raising and lowering of the headframe from a remote
position. Manual raising and lowering equipment where appropriate shall also be provided.
The entire high mast installation and floodlighting luminaries installations shall be inspected by the
manufacturer/authorized representative and certified.

6.1.6.3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

Visual inspection is to include inspection of the condition of each piece of equipment, quality of workmanship,
alignment, perpendicularity, labelling and the like, all in conformance with the Specification.
Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece of equipment before
energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps not installed.
Secure temporary electrical power supply required for testing and commissioning, incase the permanent power
supply is not available at the commissioning stage.
Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with lamps installed, including
recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of each circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation and are to include measurement of
lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated surfaces.
Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with the Specification.
Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at final points of circuits and
continuity of protective conductors.
Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.
Provide instruments to make and record test results.
Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing

Technical Specifications 6-53 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

circuits with normal power source, and as follows:

 Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated. Use
calibrated photometers.
 Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
 Check excessively noisy ballasts.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and interpreting results.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until the units
operates properly.

6.1.6.3.3 CONNECTIONS
Ground Equipment:
 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
 Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations. Connect
luminaires to grounding system with the conductor as shown on plans or in accordance with
Regulations.

6.1.6.3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer.
Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide required light distributions
and intensities.

Technical Specifications 6-54 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.7 EXTERNAL ULV NETWORK

6.1.7.1 EXTERNAL ULV NETWORK FIBER LOOP DESCRIPTION

The fiber optic loop of the External ULV Network will cover the following buildings and spaces:
Passengers Terminal Building (1), Technical Block/Control Tower (13), Fire Station and Water Tank (4), Power Station (10),
GSE Building (5), Cargo Terminal (6), Aircraft Hangar (7), Access Control/house gates (9), Fuel Farm (11), MVSG
(Medium Voltage Switch Gear), Administration Building (15), MTO (18), Presidential pavilion (22), Medical Center (14),
General Aviation (16), Staff Restaurant (17), Flight Catering Kitchens (8) and electrical substations (SST02, SST05, SST06,
SST07, SST08, SST10, SST11, SST12, SST13, SST14).
Each building has redundant fiber optic connections through a star topology to both Passenger terminal, as a
main redundant connection, and Technical Block/Control Tower, as a secondary redundant connection.
The two buildings housing the core equipments (Main and secondary) are interconnected by dedicated redundant
fiber optics.

Technical Specifications 6-55 Rev F – September 2019

CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.7.2 External ULV Network Logical Diagram

6-56
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.7.3 External ULV Network Splices for the Passenger Terminal

6-57
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.7.4 External ULV Network Splices for the Air Traffic Control Tower

6-58
CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 – INFRASTRUCTURES
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1 Part 6 – ELECTRICAL WORKS

6.1.7.5 General description of the Outdoor Optical Fiber cable

The Optical Fiber cable shall be with single mode fiber 9/125 microns complying with ITU G.652.D. It shall be
Single mode OS2 Armored outdoor cables with Bend insensitive and compliant to G652D and G657A1 standards.
The Single mode fibers shall be compliant to fiber type B1.3 and B6-A1 in IEC 60793-2-50.
The Optical fiber cores shall be color coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B code.

6.1.7.6 Single mode OS2 cable features

These cables shall have the following characteristics:
 Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable
 Loose tube structure.
 Non-metallic armor.
 Longitudinal waterproofing of entire cable without gel.
 Glass fiber anti-rodent protection.
 LSOH Polyethylene outer jacket.
 Metric marking indicating type of cable, year, ref., number.
 Secondary coating: 250 µm.
 Maximum pulling tension: 900daN.
 External diameter: < 17mm.
 Installation temperature: -5°C / +50°C.
 Storage/transport temperature: -30°C / +70°C.
 Operating temperature: -20°C / +60°C.
 Minimum bending radius:
 Static: 200mm.
 Dynamic: 300mm.
 Crush resistance:
 Permanent: 50N/mm.
 Instant: 80N/mm.
 Maximum allowable flexing resistance: 40daN.
 Weight: 300kg/km.
 Complies with IEC 60754-1.
 Complies with IEC 60754-2.
 Complies with IEC 60332-3C.
 Complies with IEC 61034.
 Complies with IEC 60331.

6.1.7.7 Engineering rules

The installation must be carried out in accordance with the laws, decrees, orders and circulars in force, according to
present specification and following the rules of art.

6.1.7.8 Recommendations for implementation

In order to guarantee the quality of the assembly and the performances of the fiber, the subcontractor will take care
during the installation to respect:

Technical Specifications 6-59 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Electromagnetic environment constraints.

 Mechanical constraints: The cables will be laid and not pulled, the reel unwinder will be
mandatory. Optical cables must not be subjected to excessive mechanical stress during their
installation, such as folding, pulling or crushing.
 The minimum bending radius recommended by the manufacturer of the "optical" cables, during
and after installation. In the absence of the manufacturer's recommendation, the minimum
bending radius retained will be 10 times the outer diameter for the optical fibre.
 The tightening will be done manually so as not to crush the cables. The interval between two
collars must be greater than 20 cm. It is requested to use reusable collars equipped with a hook
and loop closure system to avoid damaging the cables. Plastic collars will be refused.
 The system design and the path defined for the cable routing that will take into account the
limitations defined by the EN 50173 and EN 50174-3 standards in order to optimize the
transmission performance.

6.1.7.9 Identification of optical links

All optical links must be clearly marked at regular intervals and at each end. The identification will be legible and
indelible by immovable identification labels and must include at least:
 The diameter of the fiber (50 / 125μm, 62.5 / 125μm or 9 / 125μm).
 The type of fiber according to IEC 60793-2-10 (OM1, OM2, OM3, OS1 or OS2).
 The length in meters of the connection.
 The destination of the link.
 An identification code provided by the supervisor.

6.1.7.10 Technical recipe

The technical recipe has three levels of control:
 Visual check against the specifications.
 Static electrical control.
 Dynamic electrical control.
All tests are the responsibility of the subcontractor. The subcontractor is requested to provide and make this recipe.
The client must be notified of the verification and testing operations.
The recipe document must include all the elements necessary for the management of the cabling (identification of
the cables and plugs, respect of the environmental constraints and the rules of the art) as well as the result of the
tests carried out (visual controls, electrical controls static and dynamic). The Test should include each end-to-end
link. The measurement sheets will all be handed over to the client.

6.1.7.10.1 Visual control

The purpose of the visual inspection is to verify that the wiring performed complies with the requirements
of this specification with regard to:
• The verification of the materials used.
• Respect for environmental constraints.
• The routing of the cables.
• The implementation of the cables.
• The connection of the cables.
• Fixing elements (racks, panels, sockets, modules, supports, etc.).
• Tagging.
• The aesthetic aspect.

Technical Specifications 6-60 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.1.7.10.2 Static tests

The purpose of these tests is to verify that the connections are made correctly and that the cables have not been
damaged during installation. It will be necessary to verify that:
 The length of each link does not exceed the maximum value imposed by the standard.
 Isolation is correct.
 The continuity between the conductors is correct.
 The order of connection of the conductors is compliant (control of the pairing).
NB: Each of the links will have to be checked.

6.1.7.10.3 Class Ea dynamic tests of Optical link tests

These tests are intended to ensure that the installation will be able to withstand the high speeds of different
networks.
The bidirectional optical reflectometry test for all optical links shall be carried out using an OTDR reflect meter and
in accordance with ISO / IEC 14763-3.

6.1.7.11 Control and reception

It is agreed that the client may carry out at any time any type of check to verify that the wiring is made according to
the required requirements and the rules of art.
An approved inspection body chosen by the client may perform contradictory measurements and validate the correct
parameterization of the measuring instruments during the validation performed by the installer.

6.1.7.12 Commissioning
1. The installation is to be tested for quality and operation at the completion stage, test certificates and records,
certified by an official testing authority, are to be submitted to the Engineer to verify that the system provided
adheres to the installation requirements and standards of this document.
2. The system shall be tested, in the presence of the Engineer and the Employer’s representative, if required, for
proof of performance acceptance testing.
3. If deficiencies are discovered, the source of the non-compliance shall be determined, replaced, or corrected, and
the cable or device re-tested at no additional expense to the Employer.
4. Equipment for Test and Adjust is to be tested for quality and operation at the factory, and test certificates and
reports, certified by an official testing authority, are to be submitted to the Engineer before dispatch of equipment to
site. Any necessary test equipment shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

6.1.7.13 Component and solution warranty

During the warranty period the submitter, or failing that the manufacturer, is required to remedy any anomalies
occurring on the newly completed installation. He will have, at his own expense (parts, labor and displacements),
the control and the replacement of any defective element. If anomalies persist, the Client reserves the right to
proceed, at the expense of the holder and during the warranty period, to all tests that he deems necessary.
The subcontractor must certify that he possesses all the skills, know-how and qualified personnel in sufficient
number to carry out the work.
He must provide all the certifications that certify his skills with the manufacturer (and as defined by him) and that
will, through the solution he will propose during his bid, to obtain the guarantee of it (charter, certificate, approval
number, etc.).
At the end of the work, the subcontractor will provide the manufacturer's warranties in the proposed cabling
solution. The installation must comply with all the installation technical specifications defined by the manufacturer
of each product.

6.1.7.14 Component warranty

The components must be guaranteed for a period of at least 15 years from the date of receipt of the installation. The
labor for the removal and installation of each defective element must be guaranteed for a period identical to the
warranty period of the components.

Technical Specifications 6-61 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.1.7.15 Application Warranty

The application guarantee will ensure that the installed wiring will support all existing and future Class EA
applications in accordance with the ISO / IEC 11801 2nd Edition Amendment 2 standardization, for a period of at
least 15 years from the date of receipt of the realized installation.

Technical Specifications 6-62 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

SECTION.2 AIRFIELD LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

6.2.1 GENERAL

6.2.1.1 SUMMARY
This section includes the minimum specification requirements for supply, installation, testing & commissioning of
Airfield lighting and associated auxiliary equipment including but not limited to constant current regulators, lighting
fixtures, isolation transformers, transformer mountings, Airfield lighting cables and illuminated airfield signs.

6.2.1.2 REFERENCES
 ICAO 9157-AN/901: Aerodrome Design Manual, Visual Aids Part 4
 ICAO 9157-AN/901: Aerodrome Design Manual, Electrical Systems Part 5
 ICAO Annex 14, Aerodromes, International Standards and Fourth Edition Recommended
Practices
 ICAO- Procedures For Air Navigation Services (PANS), Aircraft Operations (OPS), Doc 8168 –
OPS 1611.
 ICAO 9137-AN/898: Airport Operational Services, Part 8

6.2.1.3 SUBMITTALS
Installation plans, schedules, calculations and connection diagrams for the airfield lighting equipment, including all
equipment and subsystems.
Acceptance inspection and testing plan, including procedures for airfield lighting equipment inspection and testing
to ensure proper installation and operation.
Manufacturer’s drawings, including drawings necessary for the installation and electrical connections of electrical
equipment or devices furnished.
Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/ manufacturer authorized
representative and by the contractor.
Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature, manufacturer's name, catalogue
number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and special features, as applicable for each item.
Product certificates from the manufacturers certifying their compliancy to ICAO requirements.
List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their prices for three years
of operation. This price shall be valid for three years from the date of completion of the project.
Guarantee to supply spares for the complete Airfield Lighting System Equipment for a minimum period of ten years
from the date the equipment is made operational.
The Final Drawings are indicative showing the requirements for the airfield lighting layouts and the related civil
works, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to check the Drawings and to revise the civil works to satisfy the
system performance required by the airfield equipment supplier. A compliance sheet should be submitted as part of
the tender showing in details the proposed changes to the civil works and all other system components along with a
justification for these changes.
The Contractor/Supplier shall submit the full details for the following:
 lighting fixtures,
 series transformer data,
 series transformer calculations to show that the selected transformers can cater for the cable losses,
lamp, and the remote control unit(s). Typical calculations are to be submitted for typical cable
lengths. A spare capacity of 10% shall be assumed for all series transformers.
 CCR calculations showing that the selected CCR’s selection can cater for the primary cable losses,
series transformer losses and all other factors on the network. A spare capacity of 20% shall be
assumed for all CCR’s.

Technical Specifications 6-63 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Changes to the civil network as stipulated earlier.

Contractor shall arrange for testing of the equipment at the Supplier factory to be witnessed by the Client’s and
Engineer’s representatives’ team; the team will comprise three representatives per each mission, the mission could
be to inspect one or more equipment.. Contractor is to submit testing procedures for tests to be conducted for
amending and approval at least one month prior to the testing.
Contractor is to submit site acceptance sheets based on supplier recommendations for accepting the equipment on
site.
Contractor is to submit a safety assessment document for all equipment supplied under the project.
Contractor is to provide complete technical information deemed necessary by the Client/Engineer, for the
equipments/system including the equipments and software used for commissioning, testing or troubleshooting.
The AFL contractor shall provide the complete database of the installed AFL equipments/fixtures, circuits, etc. with
extensive technical details.
The Contractor shall provide the required software application for the duct bank management information.
The contractor shall provide one complete set of special tools and test equipments required for the installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of the supplied equipments to TAA. These tools shall include, but not
limited to, the following: Installation jig for 8” shallow base,
 Installation jig for 12” shallow base,
 Installation jig for 16” shallow base,
 Installation jig for PAPI units,
 Crimping tool sets for Primary Connector Kit,
 Crimping tool sets for Secondary Connector Kit,
 Individual Torque Wrenches for different types of AFL fixtures,
 Alignment jig for elevated light fittings,
 Light unit lifting tool,
 Wyler Water level for PAPI,
 PAPI Ground Check Stick,
 Spanner for breakable couplings,
 Gear box for lowering / raising approach masts,
 Tools required for the installation and maintenance of Induction Loop System,
 Digital Oscilloscope for the Commissioning/ maintenance of the CCRs,
The proposed AFL lighting fixtures will be LED type. Contractor is to propose the selected fixtures noting that all
fixtures performance shall be certified and approved by International Regulations mentioned herein after.

6.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

All work shall be in accordance with requirements of Contract Specifications- Electrical Sections, and other
applicable Sections as well as ICAO regulations.
Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of airfield lighting system manufacturers to
perform the necessary works.
Contractor qualifications: Engage a firm fully experienced in designing Airfield lighting Control & Monitoring
System products complying with the requirements of these specifications.
Comply with contractors and manufacturers approved quality assurance plans.
The Contractor/Supplier of the lighting fixtures is to be responsible for any contradiction with ICAO requirements
concerning the selection of the fixtures as far as construction, characteristics or application, taking into consideration
the FAA circulars, irrespective of any error that may appear on drawings or in the specification herein. In other
words, ICAO recommendations are to be over-ruling and the Contractor is to advise the Engineer prior to handling

Technical Specifications 6-64 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

such erratic materials.

The contractor shall bear the full and total responsibility for all airfield lighting system design, and installation to
comply with ICAO CAT-I requirement for the Airfield visual aids, extended to provide products that are suitable for
and capable of performing their intended functions correctly and consistently and that comply with the approved
system quality assurance requirements as stated by the manufacturer and contractor.
The contractor shall deliver complete and operable Airfield Lighting system products that comply with the
minimum performance and availability requirements as indicated, not withstanding any errors or omissions in these
specifications or drawings which may otherwise render such performance/availability results uncertain or
impossible. The contractor shall resolve all such discrepancies before proceeding with the work.
In providing the Airfield lighting system the contractor shall accept total turnkey responsibility for designing,
furnishing, installing and testing all airfield lighting and the control & monitoring system products selected. The
contractors responsibility shall include ensuring that all selected components work together safely within the
Airfield lighting systems.
Bases for lighting fixtures together with corresponding application for each lighting fixture type selected by the
Contractor are to be submitted for approval by the Engineer before purchase of materials is initiated (preferably at
tendering time). Any change requested by the Engineer is to be carried out by the Contractor at his own
responsibility if materials fail to meet ICAO, FAA circulars and/or these specifications.

6.2.1.5 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT

6.2.1.5.1 Warranty
The AFL equipment manufacturer shall warrant against defects in workmanship and hardware for the equipment
specified in this section and in a minimum period of 1 year from the date of completion of the project.

6.2.1.5.2 Technical Support

The AFL equipment manufacturer shall provide the following minimum technical support during the warranty period:
 Technical Phone assistance.
 Technical Support via telephone [Local-Call] shall be available for 7 X 24 hours throughout the
year.
 Onsite Technical field support as required.

6.2.1.6 SPARE PARTS

Contractor shall provide sufficient spare parts and consumable items for two years of operation including the
warranty period. A list of recommended spare parts shall be submitted during the Tender Submission period. The
spare parts shall be delivered to TAA stores after carrying out all the required material inspection tests. The spare
parts/ consumable items shall be handed over to TAA prior to the completion of Site Acceptance tests.

6.2.1.6.1 Spare parts/ consumables

Spare parts/ consumables shall include, but not limited to the following:
 LED lamps,
 Xenon flash tubes,
 Dichroic filters of different colors,
 Filter gaskets,
 Non-sealed prism,
 Lamp holders,
 Gasket for front glass,
 Gasket for dichroic filters,
 Fuses,
 High intensity Approach inset Lights,

Technical Specifications 6-65 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 High intensity Approach Elevated Lights,

 High intensity Runway End/Stopway Lights,
 High intensity Threshold Lights,
 High intensity Runway Edge Lights,
 Runway Guard lights,
 Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) units,
 Taxiway Edge Lights,
 Stop Bar inset Lights,
 Stop Bar elevated Lights,
 Obstruction Lights,
 Wind Direction Indicator lights,
 Series isolating Transformers (of all different wattages as mentioned hereafter in this
specification)
 CCRs of all required ratings,
 CCRs’ Power supply,
 Accessories for CCRs,
 Circuit Selector Switches,
 Earthing items,
 Primary cable connector kits,
 Secondary cable connector kits.
Note: The spare items shall have the same specifications of the original items mentioned in these Specifications.

6.2.2 PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

6.2.2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Crouse Hinds (USA)
B. Honeywell (Germany)
C. Safegate (Sweden)
D Siemens-ADB (Belgium)
E. Thorn (France)
F. ERNI (Switzerland)
G. OCEM (Italy)

6.2.2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The Airfield Lighting (AFL) Contractor shall prepare all drawings required for the installation, testing and
maintenance of the AFL installations. These drawings shall consist of but not limited to the following drawings at
the minimum:
 AFL Layout drawings,
 AFL – Cable route drawings for the individual circuits,
 AFL – Layout drawings for the individual/interleaved circuits,
 AFL – Fixtures legend sheet and the quantity of the type of fixtures installed at site.
All drawings shall use standard colored legends and suitably sized with relevant information. The drawings and texts
used shall be easily readable. All Drawings shall be as per TAA standards and shall meet Client requirements.
Airfield Lighting (AFL) system shall be installed complete and tested. The lighting system shall include all lighting

Technical Specifications 6-66 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

fixtures, light bases, isolation transformers and Monitoring & Switching Control Units (MSCU), plugs, receptacles,
and illuminated signs. Unless specified otherwise on the Design Drawings, Contractor shall provide the initial bulbs
as required for all lighting fixtures plus a minimum of 10% spare replacement bulbs for Client’s future use.
The lighting system design shall utilize high-voltage (5kV), 6.6-ampere series loop circuits with a series isolating
transformer feeding each fixture lamp(s). The airfield lighting system shall be supplied from constant current
regulators and regulators’ panel board located in the Electrical airfield Substation Units (ESU’s).
The in-pavement (inset) lighting fixture mounting bases shall be shallow-can type, unless otherwise indicated. The
minimum depth of shallow base shall be 100mm.
Each taxiway fixture lamp shall be furnished with 450-mm leads with connector and shall be connected to the power
supply transformer or to the (MSCU) units with insulated wires installed in conduit. The lighting fixture base shall
be furnished with a built–in earthing terminal to be connected to the counterpoise earthing system.
Isolating Transformers and (MSCU) shall be installed in the pre-cast manhole located outside the runway / taxiway
shoulder areas.
A ground wire (counterpoise) shall be run from the AFL substation along with the series circuit cables. The
secondary side of all isolating transformer and the supports of all elevated lights shall be connected to this wire. All
airfield equipment and metallic structures associated with electrical systems shall be bonded to the system earth bar.
Elevated lights are to made of aluminum alloys and synthetic materials. All elevated lights are to be frangible.
Separate color filters outside the fittings are not to be used. Aluminum used for optical reflectors is to have a purity
level of better than 99.9%.
Inset lights are to be specifically designed for high intensity operations on airports. In particular, the runway and
threshold approach lights are to withstand modern in-present aircraft impact, rollover and static weight under all the
specified climatic conditions. Taxiway and apron lights are to resist to the static and dynamic loads of aircraft when
standing, rolling or turning.
Inset lights are to be constructed of heavy duty aluminum alloy. Where the direct impact of aircraft is expected (on
runway and displaced threshold approach lights), the refractors and/or lenses are to be sealed using a long lasting
dust and watertight compound resisting to the dynamic stresses occurring in the field and to the salt water, kerosene,
oil and cleaning, fire fighting or de-icing chemicals which could be found in the field, as well as to their residues.
Refractors used in inset taxiway light's are to be recessed and mounted in a field removable optical cartridge with
watertight feed through terminals, allowing replacement while circuits are live.
Lenses, colored filters and refractors are to be manufactured with highest quality glass capable of resisting
maximum thermal stresses met with in service.
Interchange ability of parts used in various lights is to be given priority in selection of the equipment, such as lamps.
Lamps are to be LED type, 6.6 A as detailed in the specification and/or shown in drawings, with expected 10 000 hr
lifetime as indicated.
Airfield lighting fixtures are to be of type selected by the required specifications as mentioned hereafter and as
shown on the drawing, Symbols and Airfield Lighting Fixtures’ Descriptions, or an approved equal.
Airfield Lighting Circuits shall be interleaved from two circuits, each circuit fed from a different CCR in the AFL
substation. Separate CCR’s shall be used for the following lighting systems:
 Runway Edge ,Runway End and Stopway;
 Threshold
 Approach Lighting System.
 PAPI [Precision Approach Path Indicator]
 Stop Bars
 Taxiway Edge.
 Airfield Guidance Signs.
 Stand Maneuvering and Stop position Lights
This switching logic for the spacing requirement shall be taken care in the Airfield Lighting Control and Monitoring
System (AFLCMS).

Technical Specifications 6-67 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

In general, all materials provided by the Contractor shall be new unused items suitable for the intended service in
accordance with the requirements specified herein and on the other Design Drawings and Contract documents. All
materials shall have tests to check their ability to withstand corrosion and the results of these tests shall be submitted
for approval.

6.2.2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

6.2.2.3.1 ELEVATED APPROACH LIGHTS

Elevated unidirectional high intensity white light is to provide the ICAO photometric performances for use in
category I and II conditions. It is to comply with FAA AC 150/5345-46 & E-982 as far as its construction qualities
are concerned. The fixtures shall comply with IEC-61827 Standard. The protection degree of the fitting shall be
minimum IP54.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 chapter 5 and specially appendices 1 & 2.
The average light intensity is to be at least 20,000cd white.
The maximum intensity of the main beam must not exceed three times the minimum intensity.
Construction is to consist of the following parts:
 Housing made of aluminum alloy casting of total weight with lamp and glassware not exceeding
2.7kg.
 Cast aluminum alloy slip fitter for mounting on a 60 mm outside diameter stem allowing azimuth
and elevation angle adjustment.
 High purity aluminum reflector, polished and protected by anodic oxidation of 2 to 3 micrometers
thickness.
 Hinged front glass with poly-chloroprene gasket. Glass is to be fluted if required to obtain the
specified light distribution. Front glass is to be held in captive aluminum alloy ring.
 One 6.6 A LED lamp with average 50 000 hrs. lifetime at full intensity, and to be held firmly and
precisely into the aluminum reflector. Wattage of lamp shall be 65W for both side raw barrettes
and cross bars.
 Re-lamping is to be from the rear (captive) door and without need of removing the front glass and
reflectors or using of any special tools.
 Feeder cable, gasket and front glass are to withstand the normal operating temperature for that
light.
 Feeder cable is to be 2 core 4.0mm² (AWG12) passing through a compression gland at its entry,
having a 0.5 m long, flexible, synthetic rubber insulated and neoprene sheathed cable with one
factory-molded 2-pole plug in accordance with FAA L-823, Figure 1 (AC 150/5345-26C). The
cable shall be mechanically protected for its whole run.
 Connection is to be provided by means of connector kit type FAA L-823 type II, class B, style 11
(AC 150/3545-26C).
 The light fitting is to be compact and streamlined to minimize drag to jet blast.
 Housing and slip fitter are to be protected by a stove baked, aviation yellow polyester gloss paint
deposited by an electrostatic process, after prior phosphatization.
 All screws, nuts and hardware are to be corrosion proof and made of plain stainless steel. Screws,
latches, etc... that have to be removed for servicing the light are to be of the captive type.
 Separate color filters outside the fitting shall not be used.
Mounting at ground level is to be through a frangible coupling having a 60 mm or a 2 inch, 11 TPI thread for
securing in the cover plate or to a conduit elbow.
Mounting on small posts up to 1.8m height above ground is to comprise:
 One anodized aluminum conduit stem, 54/60 mm.
 One frangible coupling having a 60 mm or 2 inch inner diameter, provided with tilt compensation
screws and having a 2 inch, 11 TPI thread for securing to the cover plate of a base or to a tilt

Technical Specifications 6-68 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

compensation system to allow adjustment vertically with errors of up to 3 degrees.

Mounting on collapsible masts, above 1.8m height is to consist of:
 Safety approach mast of suitable height, made of anodized aluminum conduits assembled by
friction or reinforced fiber-Glass material.
 Mast is to be tiltable by hand to allow maintenance of the light fitting from ground level.
 The mast is to be lightweight, not exceeding 1.7 kg per linear meter. The design is to be such that
the feeder cable to the light can be run inside one of the mast legs. Flexible stainless plasticized
steel reinforced conduit is to protect the cable between the leg joint and the transformer housing.
The top section of the mast is to be telescopic and is to allow height adjustment at plus and minus
30 cm from nominal mast height.
 All screws and other hardware are to be plain stainless steel. All nuts are to be of the self-locking
type. The entire mast is to be corrosion-proof. The mast is to comply with FAA specifications AC
150/5345/45A.
Approach elevated, unidirectional high intensity red light is to be of equal specification as above stated except that
average light intensity is to be at least 5000cd in red color and performance characteristics in accordance with ICAO
Annex 14 chapter 5, and Appendix 2, Figure A2-2.

6.2.2.3.2 INSET APPROACH LIGHTS

Inset unidirectional high intensity white approach light is to provide the ICAO photometric performances for use in
Cat. I, and II conditions.
It is to comply with FAA specifications L-850-B (AC 150/5345-46B) and IEC-61827 as far as its construction
qualities are concerned except when otherwise stated herein. The protection degree of the fitting shall be minimum
IP67.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 chapter 5, and Appendices 1 & 2. The
average light intensity is to be at least 20,000cd white.
Construction is to consist of the following parts:
 Fitting of high tensile strength aluminum alloy cover & seating ring.
 Inner cover bearing the optical sub-assembly with waterproof feeder entry.
 Inner cover mounting "O" ring rubber gasket.
 Optical sub-assembly with high purity aluminum reflectors polished and protected by anodic
oxidation of 4 to 5 microns thickness, with lamp holder.
 Three equally rated 65 W, 6.6 A LED lamps, with average 50 000 hrs. lifetime at full intensity.
 Short-circuiting device (FILM Disk Cut-out) for each lamp allowing the other one to be kept live
when the first one fails.
 The prisms shall be user-replaceable without making of sealing compound.
 Feeder wires with factory molded 2-pole plug, in accordance with FAA specification L-823, -
Figure 5 (AC 150/3545-26C).
 Stainless steel screws and watertight washers, and "O" ring gasket for mounting on the seating
ring. The load forces should never be transmitted through the gaskets of these lights but through
metal to metal contact.
 Screws and hardware are to be of stainless steel.
 The light shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover, and static loads of present-day
aircraft without damage to the light or to aircraft or vehicle tires.
 Optical components are to be keyed so as not to be mis-adjusted during re-lamping.
 The fittings shall be of Type “Toe-in right” or “Toe-in left” according to the location of side raw
barrette.
 The fitting shall be of Type “No Toe-in” for (White) light only.

Technical Specifications 6-69 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Mounting system is to comprise a 12” shallow base, with below cable entry.
Inset unidirectional high intensity red light is to be of equal specification as set out above except that the average
light intensity is to be at least 5000cd in red color and performance characteristics in accordance with ICAO Annex
14 chapter 5, and Appendix 1 & 2 Figure A2-2.
The fitting is to be supplied with one through colored red glass filter where applicable.

6.2.2.3.3 COMBINED THRESHOLD / RUNWAY END INSET LIGHTS

Combined high intensity bi-directional threshold / end, green/red light is to provide the ICAO photometric
performances for use in CAT I and II conditions.
It is to comply with FAA specifications L850-E (AC 150/5345 - 46B) and IEC-61827 Standard as far as its
structural qualities are concerned except when otherwise stated herein. The protection degree of the fitting shall be
minimum IP67 or higher.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 Chapter 5 and Appendix 1 & 2 Figure 2.3.
The average intensity is to be at least 10.000/ 2500cd green/red.
Construction is to consist of the following parts:
 Fitting consisting of high tensile strength aluminum alloy cover and seating ring.
 Inner cover bearing the optical sub-assembly with waterproof feeder entry.
 The light design shall allow for easy maintenance. Prisms shall be user-replaceable without
making use of sealing compound.
 Inner cover mounting "O" ring rubber gasket.
 Optical sub-assembly with high purity aluminum reflectors polished and protected by anodic
oxidation of 4 to 5 micrometers thickness, with lamp holder.
 Three 20W, 6.6A , LED lamps with average 50 000hrs. life time at full intensity
 Short-circuiting device (film disc cut-out) for each lamp in case of failure.
 Feeder wires with factory molded 2-pole plug in accordance with FAA specification L-823, -
Figure 5 (AC 150/3545-26C).
 Stainless steel screws and watertight washers, and "O" ring gasket for mounting on the seating
ring. The load forces should never be transmitted through the gaskets of these lights but through
metal to metal contact.
 The light shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover, and static loads of present-day
aircraft without damage to the light or to aircraft or vehicle tires.
 Screws and hardware are to be made of stainless steel.
 Total height above grade projection is not to exceed 12.7 mm.
 The optical components are to be keyed so as not to be misadjusted during relamping. No internal
adjustment shall be needed.
 The light is to be fitted with a green/red colored filters.
 Mounting system is to comprise a 12” shallow base, with below cable entry.

6.2.2.3.4 THRESHOLD INSET LIGHTS

Threshold inset lights shall be similar in construction with the combined Threshold / end lights, except for the
following:
 The luminaries shall be unidirectional in the direction of approach and showing green.
 Lights shall provided complete with 2 x 65W LED lamp and feeding cables.

6.2.2.3.5 RUNWAY EDGE INSET LIGHTS

Inset high intensity bi-directional runway edge lights are to provide the ICAO photometric performances for use in
CAT. I, and II conditions and are to comply with FAA specification L850C (advisory circular AC 150/5345-46B)

Technical Specifications 6-70 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

and IEC-61827 standard as far as the construction quality is concerned except if otherwise stated herein. The
protection degree of the fitting shall be minimum IP67 or better.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 chapter 5 and Appendix 2, Figure 2-10. The
average intensity is to be at least 10.000 cd for white light and 4,000 cd for yellow light.
Constructions fixture is to consist of the following points:
 Fitting is to consist of high tensile strength aluminum alloy cover and seating ring.
 Inner cover bearing the optical sub-assembly with waterproof entry.
 The light design shall allow for easy maintenance. Prisms shall not be sealed.
 Inner cover mounting "O" ring rubber gasket.
 Optical sub-assembly with high purity aluminum reflectors polished and protected by anodic
oxidation of 4 to 5 micrometers thickness, with lamp holder.
 Two 45W, 6.6A LED lamp with 50 000 hrs life time at full intensity.
 Short-circuiting device (film disk cut-out) for each lamp allowing the other one to be kept alive
when the first one fails.
 Feeder wires with factory moulded 2-pole plug in accordance with FAA specification L-823, -
Figure 5 (AC 150/3545-26C).
 Stainless steel screws and watertight washers, and "O" ring gasket for mounting on the seating
ring. The load forces are never to be transmitted through the gaskets of these lights but through
metal to metal contact.
 All screws and hardware are to be of stainless steel.
 The total height above grade is not to exceed 12.7 mm.
 The optical components are to be keyed so as not to be misadjusted during relamping. No internal
adjustment shall be needed.
 A yellow colored filter with a transmission of at least 40% is to be provided in the final zone of
the runway according to the requirements of the ICAO.
 The light shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover, and static loads of present-day craft
without damage to the light or to aircraft or vehicle tires.
 Main components (prism, filter, lamp, and connector) shall be shared by approach, runway
threshold / end inset fittings.
Mounting system is to comprise a 12” shallow base, with below cable entry.

6.2.2.3.6 TAXIWAY EDGE INSET LIGHTS (LED type)

Taxiway edge lights shall be of the modern LEDs type that use powerful Light Emitting Diodes as a light and color
source.
The light and its fittings shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover, and static loads of present-day aircraft
without damage to the light or to aircraft or vehicle tires.
Inset omni-directional Low Intensity Blue Light is to be used for taxiway edge lighting and to provide the ICAO
photometric performances for use as taxiway edge light as well as to comply with FAA specification as far as the
construction quality is concerned. The protection degree of the fitting shall be minimum IP67 or better. The fixture
shall comply with IEC-61827 standard.
Photometric Performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14. The minimum luminous intensity is to be
2cd in blue for beam coverage. The minimum luminous intensity is to be in accordance with ICAO requirements.
Construction is to consist of the following parts:
 Lightweight body cover and inner cover made of anodized tampered aluminum alloy.
 Optical assembly which consist of a high purity aluminum reflector with LED lamp and a
hardened clear glass lens.

Technical Specifications 6-71 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Lighting to be mounted recess in pavement on an adopted FAA-L867 steel base.

 205W, 6.6A LED lamp(s) with 50 000 hrs life time at full intensity.
 Leveling screws to be stainless steel.
 Feeding cable, heat resistant with factory molded 2 pole plug in accordance with FAA
specification L823.
 The light is to be lightweight, compact. The total height above the ground level is not to be more
than 10 mm. All screws, nuts and hardware are to be corrosion proof and made of plain stainless
steel.
Mounting of light is to be on a base mounting plate which is to be fixed to a type FAA L-867 base housing the
isolating transformer or on a conduit elbow rigidly embanked in a concrete block, leading to side-hand holes as
shown on drawings.
The light shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover and static loads of the modern in-present aircrafts
without damage to light, aircraft or vehicle tires.
Mounting system is to comprise a 8” shallow base, with below cable entry.
The prism shall not be sealed. No internal adjustment shall be needed.

6.2.2.3.7 STOP BAR INSET LIGHTS (LED Type)

Stop Bar Inset lights shall be of the modern LEDs type that use powerful Light Emitting Diodes as a light and color
source.
The light and its fittings shall resist all stresses imposed by impact, rollover, and static loads of present-day aircraft
without damage to the light or to aircraft or vehicle tires.
Uni-directional stop bar is to be provided to comply with the ICAO photometric performances for use in Cat. I, II
and III conditions and comply with FAA specifications L852 (AC 150/5345-46B) as far as the construction quality is
concerned. The protection degree of the fitting shall be minimum IP67 or better. The fixture shall comply with IEC-
61827 standard.
Photometric Performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 chapter 5 and Appendix 2.
The average luminous intensity is to be at least 50cd in red for a beam coverage as follows: horizontal ± 10° vertical
1 to 4°.
Construction of Lighting Fixture is to consist of the following parts:
 Anodized tempered aluminum allow casting cover, equipped with lead fitted with factory molded
2-pole plug in accordance with FAA L-823 Figure 5 (AC150/5345-26C), and with sealed feed-
through contacts.
 Optical assembly consisting of:
 Cadmium plated high tensile cast-iron cover.
 One window lens, heat resistant, sealed into the cover by means of "O" ring gaskets, tightened
by screws and easily replaceable by the maintenance team.
 Anodized cast-aluminum alloy base with feed-through contacts mating those of the cover
receptacle and ensuring water tightness.
 One red filter.
 "O" ring gasket heat resistant.
 Only one 45W, 6.6A 50 000hr rated average life LED lamp, prefocused.
 Anodized cast-aluminum alloy shallow base, maximum 100mm depth with sealed feeder entry
and pigtail leads, 450mm long, for installation on existing pavements.
The whole fitting and mounting system are to be fully corrosion proof. All screws, washers, nuts and hardware are to
be made of plain stainless steel.
Total height of the fixture above grade is not to exceed 12.7 mm. Internal diameter is not to exceed 215 mm.
Mounting of fitting is to be sealed in a recess cored out into the pavement. The feeding cable is to be sealed in a

Technical Specifications 6-72 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

groove sawed in the pavement.

The automatic stop bar system shall include field sensors which tracks the airplane traffic. The purpose of automatic
detection shall be to prevent several airplanes moving simultaneously on the runway from causing grid lock.
For this reason, the exit and rapid exit taxiways shall be supplied with stop bar systems.
In the switched on condition the system shall signal the pilot a clear stop signal.
To indicate to the controller in the tower at which position airplanes at the taxiways are waiting, the areas before the
stop bar shall be supervised by a suitable field sensor.
The controller shall be capable of switching off a stop bar. Once the airplane is crossing the stop bar area, it shall be
detected by a second sensor. This sensor shall automatically switch on the stop bar lights behind the aircraft. In the
event an aircraft is crossing an active stop bar, without clearance, this incursion sensor shall trigger an immediate
alarm in the tower. The dark area should advise the pilot on an error of the system.
A third sensor at the end of the taxiway shall signal the tower that the airplane has passed the stop bar area.
Besides the exit taxiways, the entry taxiways shall be secured against prohibited exit. Each sensor shall have its own
direction detection. In addition, a classification in four groups (vehicle, small, medium and heavy airplanes) as well
as a rough speed-information shall be given to the Control and Monitoring System.
The control and monitoring of the taxiway stop bars shall be via controller working positions located at the airport
control tower and used for the runways and the taxiways in co-ordination with TAA’s assignment.

6.2.2.3.8 STOP BAR ELEVATED LIGHTS

Stop bar elevated light is to be provided to comply with the ICAO photometric performances for use in CAT. I, and
II conditions and comply with FAA specifications L-862S (AC 150/5345 - 46) as far as the construction quality is
concerned. The protection degree of the fitting shall be minimum IP54 or better. The fixture shall comply with IEC-
61827 standard.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 Chapter 5 and Appendix 2.
The average luminous intensity is to be at least 2000 cd in red for a minimum beam coverage as follows:
 Horizontal : ± 7°
 Vertical : ± 4°
Construction of lighting fixture is to consist or the following parts:
 Lens is sealed with weatherproof high temperature gasket.
 Adjustable horizontal and vertical angles.
 One 25 W, 6.6 A, 50 000h rated average life, LED lamp.
 Light fixture to be protected with aviation yellow glass enamel paint.
 Standard mounting height: 14".
 Relamping shall be performed without the need of any special tools.
 A frangible column to be mounted on a standard L-867B light base with 2’’ base plate.
Fitting and mounting system are to be fully corrosion proof. All screws, washers, nuts and hardware are to be made
of plain stainless steel. Fixtures are to be of the minimum height above ground. Feeding wires are to be sealed in
conduits.
Mounting is to be through a frangible coupling having 2”, 11 TPI thread for securing in the cover plate or to a
conduit elbow.

6.2.2.3.9 STOP BAR INDUCTION LOOPS

Aircraft will be detected by sensor loops implemented into the taxiway pavement. The sensor loops are to be
connected to a junction box besides the taxiway from where it shall be connected to a detector unit. The detector
unit shall comprise the loop detectors, lightning protectors and fiber optic communication link.
Induction loops shall be made of copper cable spanning a rectangular field. If there are any changes caused by metal
introduction above the field, the detector unit shall recognize the change in the field and shall report the occupation

Technical Specifications 6-73 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

of the induction loop.

Detector units shall be housed in a waterproof enclosure (IP68) with all additional equipment including lightning
surge protectors to protect electronic circuits from lightning strikes and fiber optic link module to connect to the
electrical substation via fiber optic cable.
Detector is not to depend on atmospheric conditions. The sensor shall have an earth magnetic field compensation as
well as an auto test and auto calibration. The sensors shall detect the direction of the passing aircraft or vehicles.
Also, a classification of four groups shall be provided (vehicles, small, medium, and large aircrafts).
The sensors shall be easy to replace, without using any special tool. All field sensors must be approved by the
Engineer.

6.2.2.3.10 RUNWAY GUARD LIGHTS (WIG-WAG) (LED Type)

Runway guard light is a runway holding position elevated flashing, high intensity light to be used in night and day
and to provide ICAO photometric performances, for use in CAT I and II conditions, and are to comply with FAA
specifications. The fixture shall comply with IEC-61827 standard.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO, Annex 14, chapter 5 Paragraph 5.3.22 and Appendix
2 and FAA 150/5340-30A.
The average luminous intensity is to be at least 3000 cd in yellow light for a minimum beam coverage as follows:
 Horizontal : ± 8°
 Vertical :± 8°
Construction of lighting fixture is to consist of the following parts:
 Two light sources surrounded by a low luster black face plate and independent visors, to reduce
the amount of incident sunlight in order to maximize the contrast during on-off cycle.
 Two 15W, 6.6A LED lamp(s) with 50 000 hrs life time at full intensity.
 The fixture shall be fabricated form corrosion - resistant materials and all exterior surfaces shall
be painted in aviation yellow for added protection and visibility.
 The mounting system shall include a flexible steel tether and grooved column that will ensure that
the fixture is frangible, that will prevent the fixture from being blown onto neighboring taxiways
or runways in case the column breaks.
 Re-lamping is to be from the rear (captive) door and without need of removing the front glass and
reflectors or using of any special tools.
 Access to the electronic control device shall be achieved through a hinged waterproof lid that
permits easy replacement of the controller if needed.
 The flash rate shall be in alternating flashes of 45 to 50 flashes per minute per lamp.
 The light beam shall be adjustable of 0 to 20° vertically and ± 20° horizontally.
 The lights in each unit of ICAO Configuration A, shall be illuminated alternately.
 The unit is to be continued working on one lamp if the other lamp is out of service.
 The fixture shall be installed on a light base housing using a heavy duty base plate that shall be
designed to withstand the high bending moments induced in the fixture or to a conduit elbow.
Fitting and mounting system are to be fully corrosion proof with (IP=54) as a minimum IP rating. All screws,
washers, nuts and hardware are to be made of plain stainless steel. Fixtures are to be of the minimum height above
ground. Feeding wires are to be sealed in conduits.

6.2.2.3.11 PAPI UNIT

The PAPI unit is to provide the ICAO photometric performances required for a precision approach path indicator as
shown in Annex 14, Appendix 2, Figure A2-23 and comply with FAA specifications L852 (AC 150/5345-28F) as far
as the construction quality and environment testing is concerned.
Photometric performances are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 paragraph .5.3.5.23. up to 5.3.5.45. and
the Aerodrome design Manual part 4 - Visual Aids, Chapter 8., section 8.3

Technical Specifications 6-74 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

The PAPI unit is to provide a luminous intensity exceeding 15.000cd in red for a beam coverage of ± 2° horizontal
and vertical angle of ± 2° corresponding to the maximum intensity. In the white sector the luminous intensity is no
less than 2 and may be as high as 6.5 times the corresponding intensity in the red sector.
Construction is to be in accordance with ICAO aerodrome Design Manual, part 4, "Visual Aids", Chapter 8, section
8.3. The PAPI unit is to consist of the following parts:
 Lightweight aluminum housing bearing all the optical components.
 Single cover made of light weight aluminum with pad lockable latches.
 Twin optical groups consisting each of:
 200W, 6.6A LED lamp, with 50 000 hrs. average life time at full intensity.
 High purity aluminum reflector, polished and protected by anodic oxidation of about 3
micrometers thickness.
 Through-colored red glass filter
 Two high quality optically cut lenses in each beam to provide a constant transition zone which
is not to exceed 3 minutes of arc, over the full beam width.
 A removable front glass in order to protect the lenses.
 Gaskets for cover and front glass.
 Four adjustable stainless steel mounting legs allowing the accurate setting of the unit. These legs
are to allow the adjustment in elevation of the transition plate between 2 and 7 degrees, and allow
the adjustment of the height of the axis of the beam above the mounting concrete slab between 50
and 95 cm.
 Site adjustment of beam shall be made by means of a clinometer.
 Breakable couplings with 2 inch 11 TPI thread and mounting flanges.
 For each lamp one feeding cable made of synthetic rubber insulated, 2x2.5sqmm flexible cable,
polychloroprene sheathed with factory molded 2-pole plug in accordance with FAA specification
L-823, Figure 1 (AC150/5345-26C), and protected by a stainless steel reinforced flexible conduit
for its run outside the PAPI unit, down to the transformer housing.
 The PAPI unit is to be compact in order to afford a minimum dag to jet blast. Its total weight is
not to exceed 35 kg. The unit is to be fully corrosion proof.
 The housing, optical frame, cover, breakable coupling, flange, and cover plate are to be protected
by a stove baked polyester paint deposited by an electrostatic process.
 The housing and optical frame are to be black; the cover and breakable couplings, aviation
yellow.
 All screws, nuts and hardware are to be made of plain stainless steel and all elements that have to
be removed for servicing the unit are to be captive.
 The cover closing latches are to be padlock able. The lamp is to be held firmly and precisely into
the aluminum reflector and it is to be possible to relamp the fitting or to change the red filter
without using any special tools.
 The use of special instrument or bench for resetting the beam after relamping, filter or lens
replacement is not permitted.
 The unit is to be completely dust tight and closed.
 Special Drainage holes are to be provided for the eventual condensation water.
Mounting system is to be secured by means of breakable couplings and flanges on a concrete slab. Feeding cables
mechanically protected are to run down into the transformer housing.
Electrical supply is to be through 300W isolating transformers, series fed from constant current regulators. The
complete system of eight units are to be fed by two circuits from two different regulators, leaving one fully
operational set in case of failure of the other set.

Technical Specifications 6-75 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.2.2.3.12 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (“LED” Type)

Obstruction lights are to be double lights and are to provide the ICAO photometric performances for use as low
intensity obstruction light. It is also to comply with FAA specification L-810 except if otherwise stated herein.
Photometric performances of obstruction lights are to be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14.
 Minimum Intensity : 10 cd, red.
 Beam coverage; horizontal : 360°
Construction of obstruction light is to consist of two single obstruction lights mounted on a common connection box
housing the power terminals and the transfer relay.
The common connection housing is to be made of cast aluminum alloy. It be fitted with cable glands for the entry of
the power cable and for the entry of a monitoring cable. The obstruction lights are to consist of:
 A body made of cast aluminum alloy bearing the optical components
 Incandescent lamp, prefocused
 maximum rating: 15 W
 nominal voltage: 240 V
 average life: minimum 50,000 hrs
 A prismatic through colored red dome screwed into the upper body
 An upper body bearing the red dome and secured to the body by one thumbscrew, retained by a
safety chain.
Gaskets are to be provided to ensure the water tightness between the red dome and the upper body, the light fitting
and the common housing, the cover and the housing.
The transfer relay is to switch in the spare lamp when the main one fails.
It is to be possible to send monitoring information on the status of the main lamp.
Mounting of double obstruction light is to be designed for fixing to top of one conduit, 1 inch diameter, or by means
of a bracket.

6.2.2.3.13 WINDCONE
6.2.2.3.13.1 Material Specification
 Folding mast tilting or galvanized steel wired from a height of 7 m with vane illuminated
 Shrouds and fixing accessories stainless steel
 Windcone in highly resistant plastic (long life), alternating red and white stripes, length 4.5 m,
diameter 1 m
6.2.2.3.13.2 Obstruction lighting
The windcone will be provided with obstruction lighting.

6.2.2.3.13.2.1 Specifications of materials

 Description : omnidirectional light
 Body : reinforced polyamide fiber tinted glass mass
 Color : Yellow color aviation
 System optical : LED module accessories
 color beam : red
 Intensity light : 32Cd
 Duration life : about 50,000 hours
 Installation : support tube fixed by necklace
 Control : by crepuscular switch

Technical Specifications 6-76 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

On the top of the windcone, the lights will be fixed by steel anchors.

6.2.2.3.13.2.2 Power supply

Each device will be powered by 240 V - 50 Hz by a single circuit.

6.2.2.3.13.2.3 Controls - Controls

Remote controls will be to give the command on / off, from the HMI located in the tower cab.
The remote indication is to give information "on" to the HMI located in the tower cab.

6.2.2.3.14 AIRFIELD GUIDANCE SIGNAGE

The airfield guidance signage shall be internally illuminated guidance signs which fully comply with ICAO Annex
14, Volume 1, Paragraph 5.4 and Appendix 4.
The signage shall consist of a rigid, self-carrying and low mass aluminum housing with a poly-carbonate front panel.
The legend shall be applied inside and no paint shall be used in order to limit damage and aging to a minimum.
The frangibility shall be in accordance with ICAO requirements and must withstand wind velocity up to 216KM/h.
For frangibility reasons, in case of impact, the sign mounting legs shall separate from their mounting flange without
breaking. This frangible system shall be re-usable.
The safety ropes shall be provided with the sign to prevent the sign from being blown onto neighboring taxiways or
runways incase the column breaks
For both mandatory and information signs, the required lamp power shall be limited to 60 W per half meter panel
length for any panel height.
The lamp shall be LED and the lamp life shall be at least 50 000 hours at full intensity. The sign shall utilize a
maximum of lamps to illuminate the sign of 3m lengths, while meeting required photometric performance.
Re-lamping shall be performed without the need for any special tools and without having to open large wind loaded
panels.
Photometric requirements shall be achieved without reflectors. Electrical power supply to the sign shall be 6.6 A
series circuit.
The protection degree of the sign shall be minimum IP54 or better.

The signage sizes and color schemes shall conform to the following:

Legend Face (min.) Installed (max.)

Type of Signs Background and Inscriptions
Height, mm Height, mm Height, mm
White inscription on red
Mandatory Instruction Signs 400 800 1100 background.
Black inscription on Exit yellow
Runway Signs 400 800 1100
background.
Yellow inscription on black
background and where it is a
Location Signs 300 600 900
stand-alone sign, it shall have a
yellow border.
Information Signs other than Black inscription on yellow
300 600 900
Location Signs background.

The form and dimensions of signage inscriptions shall be as follows:

 The forms of characters, i.e., letters, numbers, arrows, and symbols shall conform to those shown
in Figure A4-2 of ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Fourth Edition, Appendix 4.

 Arrow dimensions shall be as follows:

Technical Specifications 6-77 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Legend Height Stroke

 300 mm  48 mm

 400 mm  64 mm

 Stroke width for single letter shall be as follows:

Legend Height Stroke

 300 mm  48 mm

 400 mm  64 mm

Sign Luminance:
 Sign luminance (average sign background luminance) shall be as follows:

 Red  30 cd/m²

 Yellow  150 cd/m²

 White  300 cd/m²

The luminance ratio between red and white elements for the mandatory signs shall be not less than 1:5 and not
greater than 1:10.
The average luminance of the sign shall be calculated by establishing grid points as shown in Figure A4-1 in
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Fourth Edition, Appendix 4, and by using the luminance values measured at all
grid points located within the rectangle representing the sign.
The average value is the arithmetic average of the luminance values measured at all considered grid points.
The form of characters, i.e. letters, numbers, arrows and symbols, shall conform to those shown in Figure A4-2
of ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Fourth Edition, Appendix 4. The width of characters and the space between
individual characters shall be determined as indicated in Table 4.1 of ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Fourth
edition, Appendix 4.
The face height of signs shall be as follows:

Legend Height Face Height (min)

 300 mm  600 mm

 400 mm  800 mm

The face width of signs shall be determined using Figure 4.3 in ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Fourth Edition,
Appendix 4, except that, where a mandatory instruction sign is provided on one side of a taxiway only, the face
width shall not be less than 1.94m.
Signage Borders:
 The black vertical delineator between adjacent direction signs should have a width of
approximately 0.7 of the stroke width.
 The yellow border on a stand-alone location sign should be approximately 0.5 stroke width.
The colors of signs shall be in accordance with the appropriate specification in ICAO, Annex 14, Volume 1,
Appendix 1.

Technical Specifications 6-78 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.2.2.3.15 ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS, TWO-COMPONENT FOR SEALING WIRE AND LIGHTS

IN PAVEMENT
This specification covers two types of material; a liquid suitable for sealing electrical wire in saw cuts in pavement
and for sealing light fixtures or bases in pavement. Both types of material are two-component filled formulas.
Materials supplied for use with bituminous concrete pavements must be formulated so they are compatible with the
bituminous concrete.

6.2.2.3.15.1 Curing
When prewarmed to 77º F (25º C), mixed and placed in accordance with manufacturer’s directions, the materials
shall cure at temperatures of 45F (7 º C) or above without the application of external heat.

6.2.2.3.15.2 Caution
Installation and use shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Avoid prolonged or
repeated contact with skin. In case of contact, wash with soap and flush with water. If taken internally, call doctor.
Keep away from heat or flame. Avoid vapor. Use in well-ventilated areas. Keep in cool place. Keep away from
children.

6.2.2.3.15.3 Characteristics
When mixed and cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, the materials shall have the following
properties shown in Table 1.
Tensile Properties. Tests for tensile strength and elongation shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D638.

6.2.2.3.15.4 Expansion
Tests for coefficients of linear and cubical expansion shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D1168, Method
B, except that mercury shall be used instead of glycerin. The test specimen(s) shall be mixed in the proportions
specified by the manufacturer, and cured in a glass tub approximately 2 inches (50mm) long by 3/8 inch (9mm) in
diameter. The interior of the tube shall be precoated with a silicone mold release agent. The hardened sample shall
be removed from the tube and aged at room temperature for 1 week before conducting the test. The test temperature
range shall be from 35º F (5º C) to 140º F (60º C).

6.2.2.3.15.5 Test for Dielectric Strength

Test for dielectric strength shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D149 for sealing compounds to be
furnished for sealing electrical wires in pavement.
TABLE 1 : PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS

Physical or Electrical Minimum Maximum ASTM Method Tensile

Property
Tensile

Portland Cement Concrete 1,000 psi D638

(70 Kg/sq.cm)

500 psi Bituminous Concrete

Elongation

Portland Cement Concrete 8%* D638

Bituminous Concrete 50% D638

Coef. of cub. exp.

cu.cm/cu.cm/degree C 0.00090 0.00120 D1168

Coef.of lin. exp.

cm/cm/degree C 0.00030 0.00040 D1168

Technical Specifications 6-79 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

350 volts/mil. D149

125 secs. D495

(70 Kg/sq.cm)

* 20% or more (without filler) for formulations to be supplied for areas subject to freezing.

6.2.2.3.15.6 Test for Arc Resistance

Test for arc resistance shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D495 for sealing compounds to be furnished
for sealing electrical wires in pavement.

6.2.2.3.15.7 Test for Adhesion to Steel

The ends of two smooth, clean, steel specimens of convenient size (1 inch by 1 inch by 6 inches) (25 by 25 by 150
mm) would be satisfactory are bonded together with adhesive mixtures and allowed to cure at room temperature for
a period of time to meet formulation requirements and then tested to failure on a Riehle (or similar) tensile tester. The
thickness of adhesive to be tested shall be ¼ inch (6mm).

6.2.2.3.15.8 Adhesion to Portland Cement Concrete

 Concrete Test Block Preparation. The aggregate grading shall be as shown in Table (2).
The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed rock having a minimum of 75% of the particles with at least one
fractured face and having a water absorption of not more than 1.5%. The fine aggregate shall consist of crushed and
manufactured from the same parent rock as the coarse aggregate. The concrete shall have a water-cement ratio of 5.5
gallons (21 liters) of water per bag of cement, a cement factor of 6, plus or minus 0.5, bags of cement per cubic yard
(0.76 cubic meter) of concrete, and a slump of 2-1/2 inches, plus or minus ½ inch (60 mm plus or minus 12 mm). The
ratio of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall be approximately 40% by solid volume. The air content shall be 5.0%,
plus or minus 0.5%, and it shall be obtained by the addition to the batch of an air-entraining admixture such as
vinsol resin. The mold shall be of metal and shall be provided with a metal base plate. Means shall be provided for
securing the base plate to the mold. The assembled mold and base plate shall be watertight and shall be oiled with
mineral oil before use. The inside measurement of the mold shall be such that several 1-inch by 2-inch by 3-inch (25
by 50 by 75 mm) test blocks can be cut from the specimen with a concrete saw having a diamond blade. The concrete
shall be prepared and cured in accordance with ASTM C192.
TABLE 2 : AGGREGATE FOR BOND TEST BLOCKS
Type Sieve Size Percent Passing
Coarse Aggregate ¾ inch (19.0mm) 97 to 100
½ inch (12.5mm) 63 to 69
3/8 inch (9.5mm) 30 to 36
No.4 (4.75mm) 0 to 3
Fine Aggregate No.4 (4.75mm) 100
No.8 (2.36mm) 82 to 88
No.16 (1.18mm) 60 to 70
No.30 (600 micro-m) 40 to 50
No.50 (300 micro-m) 16 to 26
No.100 (150 micro-m) 5 to 9

6.2.2.3.15.9 Bond Test

Prior to use, oven-dry the test blocks to constant weight at a temperature of 220 to 230 F (104 to 110 C), cool to
room temperature, 73.4 plus or minus 3 F (23 plus or minus 1.6 C), in a desiccator, and clean the surface of the
blocks of film or powder by vigorous brushing with a stiff-bristled fiber brush. Two test blocks shall be
bonded together on the 1-inch by 3-inch (25 by 75mm) sawed face with the adhesive mixture and allowed to
cure at room temperature for a period of time to meet formulation requirements and then tested to failure in a
Riehle (or similar) tensile tester. The thickness of the adhesive to be tested shall be ¼ inch (6mm).

Technical Specifications 6-80 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.2.2.3.15.10 Compatibility with Asphalt Concrete

Test for compatibility with asphalt in accordance with ASTM D3407.
Adhesive Compounds - Contractor’s Responsibility
The Contractor shall furnish the vendor’s certified test reports for each batch of material delivered to the project.
The report shall certify that the material meets specification requirements and is suitable for use with [Portland
cement concrete] [bituminous concrete] pavements. The report shall be delivered to the Engineer before permission is
granted for use of the material. In addition the contractor shall obtain a statement from the supplier or manufacturer
which guarantees the material for one year. The supplier or manufacturer shall furnish evidence that the material has
performed satisfactorily on other projects.

6.2.2.3.15.11 Application
Adhesive shall be applied on a dry, clean surface, free of grease, dust and other loose particles. The method of
mixing and application shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The manufacturer’s representative shall be present during the initial installation of the material to ensure the
installation procedures are in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

6.2.2.3.16 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CABLES

Airfield Lighting (AFL) Cables are to comply with ICAO Aerodrome Design Manual, part 5 and the FAA
specification L-824, type C, (AC 150/5345-7E) except if otherwise stated herein. Two types of AFL Cables shall be
included, Primary series Cables and Secondary Cables.

6.2.2.3.16.1 AIRFIELD LIGHTING PRIMARY SERIES CABLES

AFL Primary series cable is used to connect the Constant Current Regulator (CCR) to the primary windings of
Isolating Transformers. Primary cable shall be a single core, screened HV (5kV) cable and its construction shall be
as follows:
 Conductor: stranded 7 wires tinned copper conductor, minimum cross section: 6mm2 (8AWG).
 Extruded semi-conductive layer
 Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation with minimum thickness of 2.3mm.
 Brass tape screen
 Black polyethylene or PVC sheath, ozone resistant with termite repellant, minimum 1.2mm
thickness
 Supplied on non-returnable wooden drums in length of approx. 1000 meters.
Junction Kits between the primary series cable and the isolation transformers are to be done by connector kits in
accordance with FAA specification L-823, Figure 3 (AC150/5345-26C) except if otherwise stated herein.
The connector kit is designed to fulfill the following requirements:
 To ensure the electrical continuity of the screen.
 To earth the screen.
 To ensure the continuity of the primary series loop.
 To fulfill ICAO’s Aerodrome Design Manual Requirements.
The construction of connector Kit is to consist of one plug and one receptacle. The kit is to consist of:
 One male and one female connector suitable to be crimped on the series cable conductor
 One male and one female connector body
 One cable sleeve for entry in each body
 Connection accessories for the cable screen
 Filling compound (resin) ensuring the electrical insulation of the conductor and screen and the
water tightness of the connector
 Small accessories to perform a correct assembly of the connector.

Technical Specifications 6-81 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

The primary connector kit shall fulfill the following requirements:

 After assembly, the connection between the connector housings (both plug and receptacle) and the
cable must be capable of withstanding a static longitudinal pull test of 50 kg.
 This shall be confirmed by a pull test in which the connector housings shall be held or pulled in
such a manner as not to impart a crimping or clamping action to the cable, and the cable shall be
held or pulled from the conductor only (to prevent separation of the sheath from the remainder of
the cable). A force of at least 50 kg shall be applied and then released.
 A change in position between a connector housing and cable sheath of more than 10mm shall be
cause for rejection.
 Each plug and receptacle housing shall have a metal insert molded into the rubber, which shall
mate with a corresponding part of the appropriate pin or socket, to provide a permanent metal to
metal connection between the housing and the pin or socket.
 Approved
 Each plug and receptacle shall have a permanently molded pull over sleeve at the interface end, to
be pulled over completed connections, thus providing a full seal against dirt, and a second seal
against water entry. The sleeve shall be reusable for the life of the connector.
4. In cable Joints used for returns are to use the same technology as the junction kits described above except that
jointing of cables is to be direct by crimping core to core and screen to screen.
The joint is to be made of two synthetic resin shells. After connection of the conductors and of the screens the box is
filled-up with resin. After hardening of the resin, a reliable, permanent and water-proof joint is formed.
As the filling compound has a limited shelf life, the supplier is to take care of supplying compound capable of being
used until the expected installation date/ or expected cable life time.

6.2.2.3.16.2 AIRFIELD LIGHTING SECONDARY CABLES

AFL Secondary cable is used to connect the Airfield lighting fixture to the secondary windings of series Isolating
Transformers or to the remote control unit connecting to the transformer. Secondary cable shall be two cores cable
(for running into ducts) or two single core wires (when running into saw-cuts) of 1000 V nominal voltage, and its
construction shall be as follows:
 Conductor: stranded 7 wires copper conductor, minimum cross section: 4mm2 (12AWG).
 Polyvinyle-Chloride (PVC) insulation with minimum thickness of 0.8 mm.
 Outer sheath of black Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), or elastomer.
 Supplied on non-returnable wooden drums in length of approx. 600 meters.
 The connector kit for secondary cable to be supplied separately, and to be complied with the
ICAO requirements and FAA specifications.
 Cable joints in secondary cables shall not be permitted.
The secondary connector kit shall fulfill the following requirements:
 The secondary connector kits shall comply with the latest edition of FAA AC 150/5345-26 for
L823 Type II, Class B, and style 4, 5, 11 and/or 12 connectors.
 The connectors shall be made from the same thermoplastic elastomeric material as the opposite
connector of the lights or series transformers.
 The pins and sockets shall be made respectively from nickel and tin plated copper, partially
annealed to be crimped to the cable conductors.
 The secondary connector kits shall be fully watertight.
 Current Rating -20A & Voltage Rating – 600V.

6.2.2.3.17 SERIES ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS

Series Isolating Transformers are to be manufactured in accordance with FAA L-831 specification (AC 150/5345-
47) and IEC-61823 and are to comply with ICAO Aerodrome Design Manual Part 5 and to the mechanical and

Technical Specifications 6-82 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

electrical criteria specified herein below. Transformers are to be located in precast manholes at edges of Runway and
taxiways as shown on the drawings.
The isolating transformer should consist of a primary and secondary circuit around magnetic core. Insulation of
transformers is to be suitable for the primary operating voltage of 5000V.
The primary and secondary circuits should be isolated electrically. The winding should be tightly wound and secured
prior to molding to reduce the possibility of turns becoming loose. The core of the isolating transformer should
remain unsaturated in normal load conditions, but its state would change to saturated if one of the lamps connected
is blown. This will maintain the integrity of the system. In order to meet the power requirements of the lamps, the
transformers are to withstand an overload of 30% for a period of 60 minutes if operated at 100% primary current.
Transformer Operation: The transformers shall be designed to operate indefinitely under load, short circuit, or open
circuit conditions in the secondary with rated current and rated frequency in the primary. The transformer shall have
sufficient capacity to allow for lamp aging, secondary lead losses and contact losses.
Isolating Transformers are to be completely molded or encapsulated in a thermo-plastic elastomer, The primary side
is to be equipped with 2 single core 6mm2 primary cables (5kV), each 0.6m long, with one male and one female
plug as shown in FAA L-823 Figure 2, and the secondary side is to be equipped with a 2 x 4mm2 secondary cable
(1kV) of 1.2m length with a two-pole female plug as detailed in the FAA. The following operating conditions shall
apply to the isolating transformers:
 Rated voltage : 5000 V
 Rated frequency : 50 Hz
 Rated current : 6.6 A
 Operated Wattage : 500 W, 300 W, 200 W, 150 W, 100W, 65 W or 45W as per the
Drawings.
 Operating Temperature : -55 to +65 degrees Celsius
 Minimum power factor : 0.95
Transformers are to have two separate copper windings, formed by immersing the windings in hot liquid
polychloroprene. The equipment is to withstand temperatures up to 160°C for one hour. The temperature rise at full
load is not to exceed 55°C over an ambient of 30°C or 45°C over an ambient of 20°C. The transformers are to be in
continuous service and be used for outdoor application, inside draw pits/manholes and may be exposed to and
therefore protected against the effects of the following substances:
 residues of de-icing or cleaning chemicals
 salt water
 aircraft fuels
 ozone gas
 carbone dioxyde
 mineral oil
Earthing is to be provided by connecting the earthing, lead of the transformer to a welded earthing terminal inside
the base, as requested by the ICAO (Aerodrome Design Manual part 5). The earthing terminal provided within the
transformer is to be sealed in the protection envelope.

6.2.2.3.18 CONSTANT CURRENT REGULATORS

The CCR’s construction and performance shall comply to the following:
 ICAO - Aerodrome Design Manual Part 5 paragraph 3.2.1.4 to 3.2.1.6
 FAA - AC 150/5345-10E
 IEC - 61822
The constant current regulator is to be of microprocessor controlled and of solid-state type using Thyristors in series
with the output transformer for automatic current regulation against load and mains voltage variations.
The CCR’s operational parameters are to be adaptable and modifiable through the password protected operator panel

Technical Specifications 6-83 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

or through a PC / Control & Monitoring System Work Station.

The Built-in microprocessor shall allow for comprehensive monitoring and diagnosis of the CCR, and adaptation of
user defined optional parameters. It shall allow also for remote control and monitoring via a field bus system [J-Bus,
Modbus, Profibus] over Ethernet.
The manufacturer shall provide all communication message descriptions to allow integration with Airfield Lighting
Control & Monitoring System.
The CCR shall be able to communicate over the Ethernet without any external need of interface devices.
The CCR shall be equipped with a built in HV -Cutout easily accessible & protected with a key. The cutout shall
isolate the series circuit from the CCR output and provides earthing & insulation resistance measurement functions.
The on board controller shall monitor the following:
 The supply voltage variations.
 Output current monitoring for over current.
 Output current monitoring for open circuit.
 Capacitive output current monitoring.
 Monitoring of the output current for asymmetry.
 Discrepancy between actual and selected current
The CCR is to be provided with series circuit insulation monitoring, which will measure the insulation resistance of
the series circuit versus ground with both the regulator on and off. A stabilized DC voltage is to be applied between
the series circuit and the ground, irrespective of the operating voltage.
The measurement range for the insulation resistance module shall be 0 → 500 M Ohm.
It shall be possible to set two free threshold values for the generation of Earth fault warning Or alarm.
The CCR shall be circuit selector compatible, suitable for operation with Circuit Controller Unit (CCU), and lamp
addressable units without having to replace or modify in any parts of the hardware of the CCR. The CCR shall be
able to respond to circuit changes within 15 cycles. Provision is to be made to indicate a ground fault on the circuit
while permitting the circuit to operate normally when only a single ground fault prevails.
The regulator shall include an open - circuit protective device to open the primary switch after an open circuit occurs
in the secondary. The device shall be reset within 2 seconds after the control switch is turned off and re-energized,
and shall not be tripped by switching of load circuits or other transients. The overcurrent protective device shall open
the primary switch when the output current exceeds the 6.6 A current by 5%. The device shall operate within 5
seconds after an overcurrent of 5% and within 1 second after an overcurrent of 25%. The device shall reset within 2
seconds after the control switch is turned off and re-energized. The overcurrent protection shall not be activated by a
momentary (0.25 second) overcurrent caused by switching of load circuits or other transients. The CCR shall be
protected by lightning surge arrestors fitted to each series circuit.
Regulators are to be indoor type, solid state, using back-to-back coupled thyristors in series with the output
transformer for automatic stepless current correction against load and mains variations. They are to be air-cooled
naturally ventilated. Use of forced air ventilation is not permitted. Regulators are to be KVA rated as indicated, 230
volts, 50 Hz input power for ratings of 7.5 kVA and less, and 400 volts, 50 Hz input power for ratings 10kVA and
more. Output current is to be 6.6 A as indicated. Regulators are to be provided with internal DC voltage for control
power and are to be interfaced with remote control and monitoring from the control consoles. Regulators shall
have proper EMI shielding and shall not generate any kind of electro-magnetic interference causing disturbance to
the surrounding equipment.
Output current is to be maintained with up to 30% of secondary of isolating transformers open circuited. A
compensator shall set the thyristor-firing angle to adjust the output current to a reference value. The reference value
shall vary with the selected brightness step.
Power factors are to be guaranteed at not less than 0.9 for 2.5 kVA to 7kVA units and not less than 0.95 for 10kVA to
30 kVA units. The CCR shall have 25% space capacity for future additional load.
Ambient operating conditions of units are to be from - 10°C to + 55°C.
Open circuit output voltage is not to exceed 120% of nominal voltage.
CCR shall include of the following:

Technical Specifications 6-84 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Circuit breaker.
 Alpha numeric LCD display to indicate
 Output current [RMS]
 Output voltage [RMS}
 Input Power Factor.
 Input Voltage.
 Input Current [RMS]
 Efficiency
 Output Load [kVA]
 Thyristor Conduction angle.
 Leakage Resistance Value
 Series Circuit Identification.
 Brightness step [% Illumination]
 Number of failed lamps
 Display and LCD test.
 Hours Run Counter [Total + Individual Steps]
 2 Levels of Leakage resistance thresholds.
 LED's for CCR on, I-fault, earth-fault, Lamp fault and local operation. Reset button.
 Remote, off, brightness step 1 to 5 selectors. Open circuit protection device.
 Over current protection device.
 Adjustable operational parameters via the CCR front panel. Series communication interface.
 Connectors for feedback and control signals from remote stations. Input terminals, output
terminals.
 Auxiliary fuses, diagnostic connector, earth terminal, lightning arrestors, power transformer,
monitoring module, cable box and thyristors.
 Selectable remote reset for open circuit trip. Selectable remote reset for over current trip.
 Selectable internal latch function for latest intensity step. Monitoring of mains low.
All available CCR parameters [configuration/status/measured values] shall be transmitted to the control &
monitoring system.
The configuration of the CCR shall be possible from the control & monitoring system.
The configuration of the CCR shall be possible also through the network using the standard client application
or through standard browsers.
Regulators are to be provided with user configurable 3-step or 5-step brightness steps. The current shall be digitally
adjustable for all intensity steps over full current range 1.3 A (RMS) to 6.6 A (RMS). [1.3 A – Non-illumination
step].
For ease of maintenance, all modules within the CCR are easily accessible for servicing or replacement without the
use of special tools.
The output current regulation shall be ±1 % of 6.6A under the following conditions:
 Load variation between 0 % & 100%
 Supply voltage variation of -15 % to +15 %
 Supply frequency variation of ± 5 %
The open circuit output voltage shall be < 1.2 times the nominal output RMS voltage.

Technical Specifications 6-85 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

The output current shall be digitally adjustable on all intensity steps over full current range [1.3A RMS to 6.6 A
RMS. The intensity settings to be changes without de- energizing the regulator.
The CCR shall consists of output surge limitation monitoring, which shall switch off the Thyristor if output current
reaches a value greater than twice the maximum peak value in normal operation.
The taps on the output winding shall allow for matching the regulator output capacity to the actual series circuit
load. For precise adaptation to any secondary load, 48 tapping steps shall be provided.
Remote control and monitoring are to be powered locally by means of a 48V dc local supply and is to include:
 Soft On/Off control
 Brightness step control (5 steps)
 All available measured values.
 Back indication of switched controls/selected brightness
 Indication of shutdown due to overcurrent
 Indication of shutdown due to open circuit Indication of shutdown due to loss of input power
The CCR is to include the necessary interface modules for the remote control signaling and monitoring system as
described elsewhere. Resetting of CCR's should be possible by remote control from the Control Tower by a
sequence ON/OFF/ON operation. All control, monitoring and regulation circuits are to be contained in plug-in
printed circuit boards.
The CCR’s control and monitoring procedures and functions shall be available on an open industry standard
protocol. Additional options for parallel control and monitoring shall be available.
Monitoring of the CCR shall detect the status of the regulator and the constant current circuit that it powers. The
monitor shall be matched with the regulator so that it will function when the regulator is powering a load range of
50 % to 100 % of nominal rating. The monitor shall function when the regulator is in the remote or local control
mode. A visual indication shall be provided on the monitor to indicate which monitoring parameter caused the fault
indication.
The following fault conditions shall be detected:
 Loss of input power to the regulator.
 Shut down of the regulator due to operation of any of the protective circuits.
 A 10% or greater drop in volt-amperes being delivered to the circuit.
 Failure of the regulator to deliver the output current corresponding to the brightness step selected.
 A failure of a preset number of lamps in the series circuit. The load of each lamp and its
associated isolating transformer might vary. The monitor shall be adjustable so that the number of
failed lamps required to cause a failure indication will be from 4 to 10. After the preset number of
lamps fail, it shall be possible to switch the monitor into a degraded operation mode. This mode
will deactivate the fault indication, and reenergize it upon failure of an additional preset number
of lamps (1 to 5). Additional warning or alarm levels may be provided.
 The earth fault indication.
The Contractor/Supplier shall provide the software and the necessary tools required for set up and maintenance
procedures.
The CCR shall be able to handle non-linear load with no restrictions on the performance of the CCR & the Single
Lamp Control & Monitoring System signals.
The CCR shall be properly identified with engraved labels along with the Identification in the display unit.
The access to the settings of the CCR parameters shall be password protected.
The latest configuration of the CCR parameter shall be transmitted /stored in the control & monitoring system.
The CCR shall undergo detailed functional testing at factory in presence of TAA representatives before being sent to
the site.
CCR Unit is to be a self contained, metal clad, floor standing unit with lifting lugs, and two cross pieces for floor

Technical Specifications 6-86 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

mounting and with lockable doors. All monitoring and control functions are to be front mounted, cable terminal
boxes with compression glands. All terminal blocks are to be legibly marked and conveniently arranged, ready for
exterior wiring. Finish is to consist of phosphatizing and baked polyester electrostatic paint coating, color in grey
(RAL 7032).
Constant current regulators are to be supplied complete to have a fully operational system as detailed here in the
specification.
 Temperature Range : -20 to + 55 degrees C
 Relative Humidity : 10% to 100%
The input characteristics of the CCR should be as follows:
 Input Voltage: : 230V or 400 V AC, with automatic Voltage compensation
from- 15% to + 15%, shutdown when voltage is 0.8 of nominal voltage and automatic restart
when voltage is 0.85 of nominal.
 Input Frequency :50 Hz
 Maximum Overvoltage :120 % of rated voltage
 Maximum Overvoltage Time: : 50 ms
 Number of Occurrences Per Minute :1
The output characteristics of the CCR should be as follows:
 Rated Output : As shown on drawings
 Output Current : 12 ± 2 %, high voltage
 Minimum Power Factor : 95 %
 Minimum Overall Efficiency : 90%

6.2.2.3.19 SERIES CIRCUIT CUT OUT

The series circuit cut-out is used to isolate safely the series circuit from the Constant Current Regulator during
maintenance or testing operations; and also to allow periodical isolation resistance measurement of series circuit to
ground without disconnecting the series primary cable.
The Contractor shall provide fused cut outs for each series circuit connected to a CCR in accordance with CCR
rating and circuit load.
The circuit cut-out shall comply with ICAO recommendations and FAA Regulations (C150/5340-30A), and to be
compatible with all types of CCRs and Circuit Selectors.
The series circuit cut-out shall be 20A current capacity and 5kV A.C. working voltage. The cut-outs shall be
compact and placed in a closed cabinet with rotary plug-in cover of 3 positions “Operation”, “Maintenance”, and
“Test”. Body shall be made of epoxy resin, and with lockable integral handle. A built-in micro-switch shall be
included in the circuit cut-out. The micro-switch is to energize the CCR after the contacts are engaged, or to de-
energize the CCR before the contacts are totally opened.
Spare Cut-outs shall be provided for each circuit.

6.2.2.3.20 CIRCUIT SELECTOR SWITCH

Circuit selector switches are to be in compliance with ICAO standards and the FAA L- 847 specifications
(AC150/5345-5A). They are designed for the exclusive or simultaneous supply of one or more series circuits from
one constant current regulator. The circuit selectors are to allow either the simultaneous supply of several series
loops or the exclusive supply of two or more loops. Combinations of exclusive and simultaneous operation are to be
possible. The working voltage and current breaking capacity are to suit the characteristics of the constant current
regulator associated with the circuit selector. The unit is to be provided with electrical interlocks to prevent undue
simultaneous operation of two or more circuits and to de-energize the regulator when no series circuit is selected.
The unit is to have provision for remote and local control of all functions. Low-consumption 48 VDC relays shall be
built-in.
Back-indication contacts are to be provided on each power contactor. The circuit selector components are to be
housed in a sheet steel class A, NEMA type 1, indoor use enclosure designed for wall-mounting and fitted with

Technical Specifications 6-87 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

removable front panels.

Construction is to comprise high voltage vacuum contactors, switches in case of simultaneous selectors only, high
voltage terminals, compression glands for series cables and control cables, remote control terminal block, earthing
terminal, plug-in remote control relays and nameplates.
Enclosure and finish is to be equal to the CCR enclosure.

6.2.2.3.21 LIGHT BASES AND MOUNTING PROVISIONS

Airport light bases and transformer housing are to be constructed to meet the requirement of FAA specifications, L-
867, L868 (AC150/5345-42C) or E-1315. They are to be fabricated from A36 grade steel, protected by hot dip
galvanization. A temporary plywood cover is to be provided to protect the top flange during transportation and
erection. The bases are to be equipped with the appropriate type, quantity and position of duct entrance(s) and with
an earthing terminal. The spacer and flange rings, accurately machined are to be anodized tempered aluminum alloy
casting. They are to include stainless steel mounting screws and O-ring gaskets to ensure the water tightness of the
assembly. The base cover is to be made from anodized aluminum alloy casting or hot dip galvanized machined steel
or from pressed steel; and all to be yellow painted. These base covers are to be supplied with stainless steel mounting
screws and with a flat rubber gasket or an O-ring seal. Any cable entrances whether used or not used are to be
provided with water-tight seals or plugs.
Shallow light bases for mounting flush lights are to be tempered, anodized with aluminum alloy coating treated
against corrosion and are to comply with FAA L868, suitably sized for type of light installed, and provided with
necessary cable entry, glands and grommets, and suitable resin filler.
Installation of Airfield light bases/transformer housing follow instructions by manufacturer of bases in locating,
fixing and pouring of concrete.

6.2.2.3.22 EARTHING OF AFL INSTALLATIONS

Earth conductor for secondary circuits are to be connected to earthing terminals inside airfield lighting fixtures,
using an insulated green/yellow PVC earthing wire of 4 mm2 cross section, connected to an earthing bar installed in
the manhole / handhole. Cable supports, manhole/handhole steel structure, and pulling hooks etc… inside the
manhole / handhole shall be connected to the earthing bar.
An earthing counterpoise wire of 16 mm², PVC insulated green/yellow is to interconnect all earthing bars inside
manholes / hand holes and is to be earthed to a stainless steel earthing rod every 150 m and is to be terminated at the
substation earth loop. The earthing conductor is to be pulled in 50mm UPVC duct over the top row of ducts at 150
mm over the ductbank and positioned centrally over airfield lighting cables.
Airfield lighting cable shields are to be connected to the earthing terminals of airfield isolating transformer leads and
remote control units using an insulated PVC wire (Green/Yellow) of 6mm² cross-section. The airfield cable shields
are to be finally terminated at the substation earth loop nearest position to respective constant current regulator
(CCR) earth terminal. Shields at any junction of cables are to be connected together by an earthing strap (screen
wire) using appropriate cable plugs and receptacles, joint connectors and joint boxes having earthing leads embedded
in sheath and waterproof cover.

6.2.3 EXECUTION

6.2.3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

All installation works shall be done in accordance with relevant ICAO & FAA publications and circulars and
manufacturers instructions. In case of conflicts, ICAO requirements shall take precedence.
Electrical tests on a sample transformer, measuring power factor, efficiency, secondary current at full capacity and
with short circuit, and the secondary voltage with opened circuit. The measured values are to be within the limits
given by the table 2, FAA, AC 150/5345-47B.
All isolating transformers are to be tested by measuring the transformation ratio and high voltage dielectric test.
Mechanical tests on a transformer sample by subjecting it to dropping from a 2 m height on a strong surface. No
damages are to be observed in the transformer and the performances reached after the test are not to deviate by more
than 1% of the measured values before the test. Those tests will be realized according to the procedures described in
the FAA document AC150/5345-47B, paragraph 4.
Visual inspection is to include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment, quality of workmanship,
alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in conformance with the Specification.

Technical Specifications 6-88 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Insulation resistance and continuity are to be carried out on each circuit and piece of equipment before energization,
with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps not installed.
Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with lamps installed, including
recording voltage at terminals of ballast’s on final columns of each circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to include measurement of lighting
levels and uniformities on required illuminated surfaces.
Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with the specification.
Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance and continuity of protective
conductors.
Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.

6.2.3.1.1 Test equipment and labour

Provide equipment and labour including instruments and complete provisions for carrying out tests.

6.2.3.1.2 Installation of Wire and Cable

 Before installation of wires and cables, a suitable wire brush and swab is to be pulled through the
duct to remove extraneous matter and to verify that the duct system is free of obstructions. Ducts
are to be dry before installation of wires and cables. Water is to be removed from manholes,
handholes and light bases before installing cables.
 When more than a single cable is pulled, all cables are to be pulled directly into the duct from the
coils or reels on which they are received. They are not to be pulled off and laid on the ground prior
to installation. All pulls are to be made in one direction.
 No wire or cable is to be left under tension nor against bushings or fittings. Where pulling grips
are used, damaged ends are to be removed as soon as wire and cable have been installed. Cable
and conductor pulling tensions recommended by the manufacturer are not to be exceeded.
 Lubricants for pulling wires and cables are to be Ideal Industries Inc., Sycamore, I11. type Yellow
77 or No. 100 Mineralac or approved equal. Nylon rope is not to be used to pull cable into ducts.
 Ends of all wires and cables are to be marked for identification. Terminal ends at equipment and
at all terminals between are to be identified by permanent, non- metallic tags, vinyltape or sleeves.
Groups of wires or cables with the same circuit number are to be identified by a common tag, tape
or sleeve with the circuit number, machine printed.
 Where wires and cables are terminated or jointed at locations such as control boards, switchgears,
etc., pressure type terminal lugs or connectors are to be used. Terminations are to be in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Shielded cables are to be stripped back to a safe distance according to the circuit voltage, and at
such points, the terminators, stress cones or similar devices are to be installed for stress reduction.
 Splices or terminations are to be watertight and protected from mechanical injury and sealed to
prevent entrance of moisture. The Contractor is to take the utmost care to prevent the entrance of
water into the cable prior to and during installation. The Contractor is to check to determine if any
water has entered the cable; if not, the cable ends are to be sealed unless they are to be
immediately spliced. If water has entered, the cables are to be cut back until no water is present,
and sealed. All metallic shielding components are to be grounded.
 Cables are to be neatly trained and racked in manholes and hand-holes.
 Cable are to be identified with anti-corrosion and saline-proof flexible metallic labels which are to
be engraved with cable reference as instructed by the Client.
 Manholes are to be identified with the aid of durable painting applied on top of manholes.
Reference numbering shall be submitted for the Engineer and the Client. approval.

6.2.3.1.3 Testing
The Contractor is to supply all necessary equipment and appliances for a complete testing and commissioning. Any
special software and hardware tools used for this purpose shall be the property of the owner. The Contractor is to

Technical Specifications 6-89 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

test and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer the following:

 All the lighting levels and information achieved are in accordance with ICAO regulations. All
equipment for testing are to be ensured by Contractor on site for proper testing. The testing and
results shall not be considered final and accepted unless the acceptance and testing sheets are
signed approved by the Engineer.
 The CCR’s and addressable control system shall be tested as per the relevant annexes of ICAO
and as recommended by; the Manufacturer.
 The CCR’s shall be tested after the completion of the installation to the designed ambient
condition and full load rating.
 All lighting power and control circuits are continuous and free from short circuits.
 All circuits are free from unspecified earths.
 The insulation resistance to earth of all un-earthed series circuits is not less than 50 megohms.
 The insulation resistance to earth of all un-earthed conductors of multiple circuit is not less than
50 megohms.
 All circuits are properly connected in accordance with applicable wiring diagrams.
 All circuits are operable. Tests are to be conducted that include operating each control not less
than 10 times and the continuous operation of each lighting and power circuit for not less than
11/2 hour.
 On selected samples of the isolation transformers, the following functional tests shall be
performed.
 Power factor, efficiency and secondary current at full capacity and with short circuit.
 Secondary open circuit voltage.
 Transformation ratio, dielectric test
 A complete functional test of the photometric performances of the fixture shall be made on each
series of lights. This functional test shall involve:
 The plotting of luminous intensities in horizontal & vertical axis.
 The computing & drawings of the average intensity in the specified beam coverage.
 The plot of isocandela curves corresponding to ICAO- Annex 14 Volume-I, Appendix 2
requirements.
 The photometric measures shall be carried out on the complete fixture equipped with their
closing glasses, filters and other accessories necessary for the normal service.
 The light shall be powered at its nominal current and the measures shall be made at the
operating temperature of the different components especially for the colored filters.
 For the considered beam coverage functions, it shall take into account the tolerances of the
light positioning & orientation. When colored filters are used, the color point shall be at the
operating temperature of the filter. This color point shall comply with the ICAO requirements
indicated in the appendix 1 to Annex 14.
 For all the lights the main functions and dimensions shall be controlled in order to establish
the conformity according to the requirements.

6.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
Installation of airfield lighting materials and equipment shall conform to ICAO requirements, the manufacturer's
instructions, and applicable codes. In the event of any conflicts, ICAO requirements shall take precedence.
If Airfield lighting and signage are existing within the Project Area, as may be denoted on Design Drawings, these
airfield elements shall be visually inspected by the Contractor. If these elements shall be utilized with the necessary
adjustments as coordinated with, and approved by the Engineer.

6.2.3.3 SITE TESTING

Technical Specifications 6-90 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Test airfield lighting system in accordance with the applicable ICAO recommendations and the manufacturer's
written instructions, and applicable Electrical sections.
Photometric performance and candela levels measurement of inset lights as per ICAO regulations.
A flight check shall take place to confirm the setting of PAPI units and to ensure the required harmonization of
PAPI system with Instrument Landing System. The flight check shall be carried out by a competent authority in
accordance with ICAO recommendations mentioned in Aerodrome Design Manual, Part 4, Chapter 8, Paragraph
8.4.16.
Carry out the performance testing of the equipment / System in accordance with the relevant clauses of the
specification.
Perform flight checking of the installed lighting system in accordance with ICAO Airport Operational Services
Manual – Part-8 Chapter-5.
Carry out the onsite comprehensive photometric testing of the installed Taxiway & Runway lighting system utilizing
a mobile lighting measurement unit & workshop set up (photometric bench) of sufficient accuracy to check
compliance with ICAO photometric requirements. Subsequently hand over these equipments to TAA.
The minimum specifications for the photometric testing equipment shall be as follows:
 The system shall be able to measure both inset and elevated runway and taxiway fittings, designed
to measure performance against the criteria for beam intensity and orientation defined in ICAO
Annex 14, using the test methodology that Annex 14 specifies.
 The System shall comprise of the following as minimum (equipment to be supplied to TAA):
 Trailer / Vehicle mounted real time data acquisition system able to operate at high vehicle
speeds [up to 80 Km/h]
 PC based Data Analysis System for data storage, analysis and output.
 Workshop Tester for testing fittings prior to return to service.
 Management software for the identification of lighting installations – fixtures, CCR, circuits,
manholes & geographical position. [GPS based system for accurate positioning].
 A software bridge for linking the above system to Airfield Lighting Control & Monitoring
System.
 Provide training to TAA- staff on usage and configuration management of the measurement
system.
 The Key Feature for the above equipment shall include of:
 Measure beam intensity & orientation in candela to ICAO standard.
 Fast & accurate with less than 5 % deviation.
 Versatile – Capable of monitoring entire range of Airfield Lighting fixtures & installations.
 Robust & reliable for usage under all weather condition.
 Provide summary report for regulatory authority & management.
 Provide Isocandela diagrams for detailed information on each fixture.
 Equipment already in use at major airports & civil aviation authority.
 Provide support from original equipment manufacturer [Software/ hardware/ calibration/ Spares]
for three years of operation at site.

6.2.3.4 DEMONSTRATION
Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation; the team could be
trained to handle one or more equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout
Procedures”.
Engage an advanced training course at manufacturer premises to train the Employer's maintenance team on
procedures and schedules for operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, servicing system, and for preventive and
corrective maintenance, the team could be trained to handle one or more equipment. The team will comprise four

Technical Specifications 6-91 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

persons. The training course period should be at least two weeks.

Technical Specifications 6-92 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

SECTION.3 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEMS

(AFLCMS)

6.3.1 GENERAL

6.3.1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes the minimum specification requirements for the Airfield Lighting Control and Monitoring
Systems (AFLCMS) at The MSALATO Airport.
The system shall have the capability of controlling and monitoring the entire Airfield Lighting Installations
including integration with other systems as detailed hereinafter.
The system shall comply with the latest edition of the following ICAO standards:
 ICAO-Annex 14 Volume 1 – Aerodrome Design and operations.
 ICAO-Aerodrome Design Manual, Part 4 – Visual Aids.
 ICAO-Aerodrome Design Manual, Part 5 – Electrical Systems.
 ICAO-Manual of Surface Movement Guidance and Control Systems (SMGCS)
 ICAO-Manual of Advanced Surface Movement Guidance and Control Systems (ASMGCS);
[Doc.9830 AN/452]
 ICAO- Procedures for Air Navigation Services (PANS), Aircraft Operations (OPS), Doc [8168 –
OPS 1611].
 ICAO – Doc [9137-AN/898], Airport Operational Services, Part 8
The system shall also comply with the last edition of the relevant FAA Standards or equivalent Eurocontrol
Standards, where it is not in contradiction with above standards.
Note: ICAO standards shall govern for all operational and photometric performance.

6.3.1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work for the airfield lighting control and monitoring systems shall include, but not be limited, to:
 Complete control and monitoring of the airfield lighting installations comprising lighting fixtures,
CCR’s, stop bars, lead-in lights, etc. The system is to be capable of controlling and monitoring up
to 2500 addresses and segmental selector switches to ensure Aircrafts’ routes as per ICAO
recommended action for CAT I operations.
 Airfield lighting (AFL) system shall be put in proper operation in accordance with above
regulations. The system shall include all lighting fixtures, transformer housings, bases, plugs,
receptacles, isolation transformers and power to illuminated signs.
 The system shall comprise Remote Control Units (RCU) for Runway, Exit Taxiways, and Aprons,
and Circuit Selector Switches (CSS) for Taxiways, which shall control and monitor the different
airfield lighting. The control of the system operation is to be fully controlled from the Air Traffic
Control Tower (ATCT). Contractor is to coordinate so as to provide all necessary interfaces to
ensure a proper operating system in accordance with the TAA requirements.
 The AFLCMS manufacturer/contractor shall integrate the system with the following external
systems at TAA to achieve the functionalities as described in the specifications:
 Ground Movement Radars (GMRs),
 Meteorological System (METEO),
 Instrument Landing System (ILS),
 Gate Operating System (GOS), and
 Flight Information System (FIDS) or Airport Operational Database System (AODS).

Technical Specifications 6-93 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.3.1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

The system shall be capable of maintaining the airport operation under CAT I flight conditions.
The AFLCMS shall provide air traffic controllers at Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) with an integrated
computerized system to monitor, manage and control the Airfield Lighting System. It shall also integrate all other
systems namely GMR, METEO, Met Sensors, ILS and other systems which shall be available at MSALATO
Airport.
The system shall, as a minimum, ensure the following:
 give air traffic controllers a tool to manage and to control the ground traffic,
 monitor airfield lighting and report warnings and alarms as it detects lighting changes or failures,
 Control Airfield Lighting to allow flexible use of runways, taxiways and aircraft stands during
specific “CAT I “ operations and scenarios
 significantly enhance safety on the airfield
 be software controlled allowing flexibility for modifications, enhancements and expansion.
 Provide a Graphical User Interface, with instantaneous feedback, allowing for ease of control.
The system shall utilize a fail safe soft architecture, with no single point of failure that meets or exceeds minimum
ICAO requirements for runway approach lighting and the control and monitoring of all airfield lighting systems.
The system shall include an integrated Addressable Lighting System to control and monitor individual lights
through the use of a Remote Control Unit at the airfield lighting secondary circuits for Runway, Exit Taxiways and
Aprons. This sub-system shall communicate with the Remote Control Units at the airfield lighting secondary circuits
via the wave carrier of the primary series circuits or through additional communication cables.
The system shall also include a control and monitoring for selector switches commanding groups of lights
(taxiways) through the same concept adopted for remote control units.
The system shall be fully parameterized system, which shall minimize the need for any program level customization.
The system shall support Administrator configurable security management and central administration of the remote
systems.
The system shall be based on a flexible architecture allowing easy customization without the need to re-code.
The system shall be Client-Sever based system supporting distributed system architecture.
The system shall support auditing and context sensitive on line help.
The system shall utilize the latest state of the art technology utilizing RDBMS & industrial standard database
system.
The system shall be fully scalable without the need to replace the existing hardware for expansion, but with
providing additional hardware.
The system shall utilize a competitive platform for powerful expansion, scalability, security & flexibility.
The AFLCMS Application shall be platform independent and shall support instantaneous system recovery.
The system shall provide extensive and comprehensive reporting tools, graphical analysis tools & online monitoring
and analysis tools.
The system shall be provided with full-scale simulation modules.
The system shall support generation of web pages, e-mail, SMS etc. for transmission to the users.
The system shall allow remote web support, maintenance & diagnostics.
The system shall consist of an online repository containing all technical manuals, O & M documentation,
catalogues, diagrams, drawings etc…
The system shall be able to receive and present all monitored states or data available from the remote equipments.
All processing computers in the system shall be fault tolerant and shall utilize RAID technology.
Failure or restart of any User interface computer shall not necessitate any user input for updating the lighting system
commanded states. All lighting states shall be updated automatically from the processing computers.

Technical Specifications 6-94 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

The system shall include a fully documented Open Interface, with sufficient information on its physical and
functional characteristics and protocols, to allow a third party Contractor to replicate the control and monitoring
functions, without recourse to the to the supplier of the AFL or the AFLCMS.
The system shall be based on open system architecture, highly configurable and scalable & able to accept
equipments/devices from multiple manufacturers/suppliers without any restriction.
The system shall be a rule-based system, which can accept complex and multiple changing operational
requirements.
The AFLCMS manufacturer/ contractor shall provide the required Software Applications, Operating Systems,
Software Drivers, Diagnostics tools, Interface software’s, Software Bridges etc. that being essential for achieving
the full functionality of the system as described in the subsequent sections.
The AFLCMS manufacture/ contractor shall provide the required Hardware equipments, tools, testing & measuring
equipments essential for a fully functional system.
Only commercial off the shelf products, equipments, hardware, software shall be utilized.
The AFLCMS manufacture/ contractor shall provide the full functionality details, technical manuals, interface
descriptions, & software/firmware/ hardware access required for the inclusion of products or equipments from other
manufacturers at a later stage without the need to go back to the AFLCMS manufacturer.
The AFLCMS shall ensure that the following data is available:
 The operational status of all Airfield Lighting System (ON, OFF, FAULT).
 Lamp fault information.
 Location and type of the Lamps, Fixtures, Transformers, Remote Control Units, Induction Loop.
 Status, control, switching for selector switches.
 Insulation value of each series circuit.
 Operational hours of each circuit at each intensity stage.
 Operational hours of the lamps at each intensity stage.
 Actual current in each circuit.
 Operational status for the component of the control and monitoring system.
 Operational status for the communication system of the control and monitoring system.
The graphics screen shall contain context sensitive online help for every function.
The user shall call up detailed information from the database by clicking the mouse on the lighting elements in the
graphic image or by entering the object type using the keyboard. The detailed information shall be displayed in a
user-friendly form.
All type of information shall be able to be printed through the network printer.
The airfield lighting systems control and monitoring components shall consist of state-ofthe-art Remote Control
input/output (I/O) units (field devices) and power line RF carrier telemetry units communicating with personal
computers (PCs) via the power circuit.
The networking components shall be based on fast ETHERNET that provides 100 Base FX optical fiber
interconnectivity, fully integrated system access, including the transportation of airfield lighting system data
throughout the airfield, Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT), AFL substations (vaults), and AFL maintenance shops.
Inter-facility distribution (ATCT, AFL substations, and AFL maintenance shops) shall be via optical fibers.
Airfield graphics and lighting information shall be displayed on high brightness LCD monitors, controlled via touch-
screen facilities and/or via a mouse pad. Control units shall be integrated into the Controller’s consoles
The system clock shall be synchronized using the global positioning satellite (GPS) navigational system as a
primary reference source.
The airfield lighting control and monitoring system (AFLCMS) shall be completely redundant for the runways and
the taxiways and aprons, starting from the level at the airfield substations and up to the control power equipment.
In the Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT), the workstations for the runways and the taxiways shall be redundant

Technical Specifications 6-95 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

(primary and backup)

In the AFL electrical substations, the components for runway control and taxiway control shall also be redundant.
These sub-networks in the substations, in the control tower as well as in the maintenance shops shall be linked
together by a redundant fiber optic cable loop.
In the AFL substations, the regulators (CCRs) for the runways, and the single lamp monitoring systems, redundant
station bus systems shall be coupled via gateways to the redundant optical fiber loop.
All equipments inside the AFL Substations [Such as CCR’s, Single Lamp Control System, Induction Loop sub-
system, etc.] shall be able to communicate through Ethernet LAN.
The maintenance workshops shall be equipped with identical technical working positions. All workstations shall be
redundant. In the event of one workstation failing, the other workstation takes over.
The operating system shall be the latest version of Windows, or similar. The User Interface [ATC & Maintenance]
computers shall be based on Windows Platform.
Communications with the field devices for the single lamp control and monitoring shall be via the wave carrier of
the series circuits power cable of the airfield lighting system, or via individual communication cables. The
communications shall be independent of the load, the brightness level and the insulation resistance of the series
circuit.

6.3.1.4 SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall test the illumination levels produced by the lighting fixtures in several areas of the taxiway and
runways, to confirm compliance with ICAO Regulations. Contractor is to repeat all necessary areas which do not
comply with the regulations until the levels achieved are approved by the Engineer.
The specifications as stipulated herein is a specification for control by utilizing power line wave carrier or individual
communication cables system between the lighting installations and the AFL Substations/Control Tower (PC’s).
Contractor is to propose the system intended to be used with all necessary details and/or modifications to the
drawings for approval by the Engineer.
The contractor/Supplier shall check the design conditions with regard to transformer ratings, cabling arrangement,
and power of lamps, and shall advise the Engineer in case of any contradiction with the products range and
characteristics. All AFL cabling details shall be provided by the Contractor/ Supplier based on his own approved
AFL control system.
Submittals shall include product data for each system or subsystem component, including manufacturer’s
specifications and Contractor’s general tender specifications and plans.
Submittals shall include shop drawings detailing the single-line block diagram showing the flow and interconnection
of all products for this system.
Submittals shall include wiring and networking drawings detailing terminals and wiring connections for power,
communications, touch-screen monitors, fast ETHERNET hubs, lamp bases, central processing units (CPUs),
cabinets, computers (workstations), power line carrier units, remote data acquisition and control input/output (I/O)
units, network transport interfaces and the network management system, and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and
maintenance.
Submittals shall include assembly drawings (drawn to scale) detailing the exact size of all cabinet, rack, and base
mounted components that make up the system. These drawings shall be coordinated for correct sizing with the
Owner/Engineer.
Submittals shall include product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
specified ICAO requirements.
Submittals shall include installer certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with
requirements specified under the “Quality Assurance” Article. Upon request, submit evidence of experience and
relationship with product manufacturer.
Manufacturer certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that manufacturers comply with requirements specified
under the “Quality Assurance” Article. Upon request, submit evidence of design and manufacturing experience.
Submittals shall include details of all Software applications [Third Party COTS & ALCS – Applications], Operating
Systems, Database Programs, Software Drivers, Software-Hardware Tools etc. which is used in the system.

Technical Specifications 6-96 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Submittals shall include license details for above software’s, which shall be handed over to TAA.
Submittals shall include a list of recommended spare parts for the operation of the system for a period of three years.
Submittals shall include the following documents:
 The Complete System Design Description Document for the contractor proposed system,
 The contract specifications cross reference matrix against the proposed system,
 System Verification Matrix,
 System Safety Assessment document.
Submittals shall include Contractor’s and manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Plans.
Submittals shall include maintenance data for the system to include in the operation and maintenance manual.
Submittals shall include calculations for sizing system parameters and essential power and control for the system.
The Contractor/manufacturer shall provide the complete details of the documentation package that will be provided
along with the project. The AFLCMS contractor shall demonstrate that he is capable of providing a professional
documentation package that meets the requirement from the Client.
The documentation shall include, but not limited to, the following:
 Training Manuals for all levels of training.
 Complete System design description.
 As-Built Drawings, schematics & block diagrams for the complete system.
 Operation & Maintenance manuals for the complete system, sub-system, equipments, devices
etc…
 System Administration Manual.
 System Reconfiguration Manual.
 Third Party Software, Hardware manuals.
 Two Backup Soft copy [CD/DVD] for Operating Systems, Software Applications, Drivers,
Interfaces, Configuration files etc…
 Complete documentation for application Software, Software Interfaces, drivers, etc.

6.3.1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of airfield lighting
system manufacturers to perform Work of this Section.
Contractor Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a quality program that is certified by an Independent Authority
to ISO 9000. In particular, the System shall be designed and manufactured to ISO 9000-3 (TickIT). Tenderers shall
provide evidence about their Quality Assurance certification. The Contractor shall be fully experienced in designing
Airfield Lighting Control and Monitoring System (AFLCMS) products complying with the minimum requirements
of these Specifications and experienced with at least 5 large-scale projects of similar size and scope.
The Contractor shall have an established quality control system. The Contractor shall formulate a Quality Control
Plan and provide a copy to the Engineer, within two months of Contract award.
The Contractor shall have an established Software Quality Assurance and Configuration Management System. It
shall use the system in conducting the work in the contract.
Only English language shall be used for all training manuals, Technical-Documents, Debug tools, Debug Logs,
configuration files, Labels, system identification, event logs etc. The usage of any other language within the
complete system, sub system or any other location is not allowed.
All technical manuals, documents shall be specific to the system in use.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory”.

Technical Specifications 6-97 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Comply with applicable parts of ANSI/EIA/TIA, NEMA, ASTM, ICAO, IEEE, ISA, ISO, and CCITT.
Comply with applicable safety standards of MPR-11, UL, CSA, DHHS, TUV, and ICAO,
Comply with Contractor’s and manufacturer’s approved quality assurance plan.

6.3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

The Contractor shall bear full and total responsibility for all airfield lighting and the optical fiber transport products
designed, furnished and installed under the terms of this Contract. The Contractor’s responsibility shall extend to
providing products that are suitable for and capable of performing their intended functions correctly and consistently
and that comply with the approved system quality assurance requirements as stated by the manufacturers and
Contractor.
The Contractor shall deliver complete and operational AFLCMS products that comply with the minimum
performance and availability requirements as indicated not withstanding any errors or omissions in these
Specifications or Drawings which may otherwise render such performance/availability results uncertain or
impossible. The Contractor shall resolve all such discrepancies before proceeding with the Work.
In providing the AFLCMS, the Contractor shall accept total responsibility for checking the design, furnishing,
installing and testing all airfield lighting and the control and monitoring system products selected. The Contractor
shall ensure that all selected components work together safely.

6.3.1.7 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT

6.3.1.7.1 Warranty
The AFLCMS manufacturer shall warrant against defects in workmanship, hardware and software for a minimum
period of 1 year from the date of completion of the project.

6.3.1.7.2 Technical Support

The AFLCMS manufacturer shall provide the following minimum technical support during the warranty period:
 Technical Phone assistance.
 Technical Support via telephone [Local-Call] shall be available for 7 X 24 hours throughout the
year.
 Onsite Technical field support as required.

6.3.1.8 SPARE PARTS

Contractor shall provide sufficient spare parts and consumable items for two years of operation including the
warranty period. A list of recommended spare parts shall be submitted during the Tender Submission period. The
spare parts shall be delivered to TAA stores after carrying out all the required material inspection tests. The spare
parts/ consumable items shall be handed over to TAA prior to the completion of Site Acceptance tests.

6.3.2 PRODUCTS

6.3.2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Approved Manufacturers shall fulfill the compliance with the design and specifications requirements and shall have
extensive experience in major International Airports. The Technology used shall be proven and demonstrated at five
major International Airports.

6.3.2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

System administration functions shall be carried out employing a combination of the standard administration utilities
provided by the latest version of Windows (or similar), third party software products and AFLCMS utility
applications.
The Developer access to the AFLCMS shall be provided to include the following:
 Change AFLCMS database configurations: addition and deletion of all types of objects, lighting
fixtures controls, and associated relations, etc…
 Reconfiguration of the HMI screen and Operator interface: addition and deletion of the control

Technical Specifications 6-98 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

buttons, carrying out changes in the HMI screen layout, etc…

 Carrying out changes in the AFLCMS-Kernel software codes to execute any changes in the logic
that may be required at a later point of time.
 Well-defined and documented interface to allow communication with external systems.
The deliverables shall enable all above changes to be carried out by the TAA Authority Staff without the need for
any additional software or equipment.
The control and monitoring system shall function as a fast ETHERNET interface to every computer, monitor,
display, CCR, CSS and Remote Control Unit (RCU) I/O units located throughout the airfield and shall be displayed
on LCD-TFT and plasma color displays with touch pads and/or mouse control unless otherwise specified.
The control and monitoring system shall function as the most advanced network technology available today to
provide superb high speed non-blocking communications controlling and monitoring. The control and monitoring
system including the communications network shall be fully redundant.
The control system shall utilize personal computers (PC’s) with standard hardware and software applications, which
shall be used for the lighting control and monitoring of the AFL installations and shall provide flexible and easy-to-
use zoom facility for all airfield lighting installations including stop bars, crossing areas, hot points, etc... All airfield
lighting installations which are to be controlled by the computers shall be displayed on the layout along with their
status. Mouse control of the screen functionalities shall be provided, including control of switching arrangements.
The control and monitoring database shall be compiled, stored, and manipulated by the system’s hot-standby Central
Processing Units (CPUs). The CPUs (fully redundant industrial grade personal computers) shall allow the Air
Traffic Control/Maintenance Services (ATC/MS) controllers to control (execute), view (monitor), and verify that
new or revised data into the airfield lighting system is correct, and exercise full authority over the control and
monitoring of the total airfield lighting system.
The hot-standby CPUs (fully redundant personal computers) containing the functional AFLCMS data shall be
physically located in the airport control tower equipment room. The controller workstations (PCs) shall be located
in the control tower.
The AFLCMS containing permanent records pertaining to the airfield lamps shall only be maintained by the
ATC/MS controllers. Access to the AFLCMS shall only be from the CPUs located in the control tower. Entering
the CPUs shall require special access codes. The CPUs shall store, on disk drive, a permanent record of the state of
the airfield lighting system. The ATC/MS system controllers shall maintain, store, format and control AFLCMS
status information.
The software shall be provided complete with all of the software licenses. The licenses shall be transferred to the
Employer.
The system shall allow the ATC controller to manage the movement of an aircraft on the airfield by selective control
and monitoring of lights either in single mode or in segments including stop bars, taxiways, etc…, up to the
designated aircraft stands for stopping. The system shall be fully dynamic, allowing the ATC to select the route,
illuminating all necessary stop bars and ensuring safe movement of the aircraft up to the parking aircraft stand / gate.
For every segment in the system, AFLCMS shall monitor and report the following data:
 Commanded (ON/OFF) state of the segment.
 Actual state of the segment (calculated from the reported states of the lamps)
 The AFLCMS shall monitor and report the number of lamps out on per segment basis in segments
controlled by an addressable system, and per CCR basis in segments controlled by Circuit
Selector Switches (CSS). A warning and alarm shall be triggered if the percentage of lamps out
exceeds a configurable threshold.
 The detailed viewer for the segment shall show the details about the lamps and remote control
units in Addressable segments and the position of the segment in the Airfield, etc...
In segments controlled by an addressable system, there shall be an alarm indication for the failure of an adjacent
lamp within the segment or in between the two segments. The system shall also allow the control and monitoring of
the airfield lighting installations to ensure a safe take off and landing in accordance with the regulations for Cat I
operation or any lower selected operation category. Full control of the landing direction shall be controlled from the
ATCT, switching from one direction shall be done within two seconds to allow for a fast response.
For every CCR in the system, the AFLCMS shall monitor and report the following information:

Technical Specifications 6-99 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 The commanded intensity, as recorded by AFLCMS.

 The actual intensity, as reported by the regulator.
 Insulation value for the circuit.
 Actual current.
 Local control mode warning.
 Over-current alarm.
 Low current alarm.
 Earth-Fault warning.
 Earth-Fault alarm.
For each circuit the AFLCMS shall track the number of hours of operation at each intensity level. The usage hours
shall be stored in a persistent storage and possible to reset the values to at any time. The AFLCMS shall show the
estimate number of failed lamps within every circuit at any time.
The control and monitoring system shall include the following system operational functions:
 Complete Desks and table configurations suitable for mounting all PC’s working stations.
 Controller working positions at the Control Tower for the control and monitoring of the runway
and approach lighting systems, taxiway and stop bar lighting system.
 Duplicate position for the controller working position at the Control Tower.
 A controller position for controlling and managing the Aprons, whereby the controller will select
the gate for the specified aircraft, which will enable the data to be transmitted to the gate operating
system (GOS) and to switch the lead-in lights on.
 Technical working positions in the maintenance center and in the AFL substations (AFLSS).
 Control & Monitoring of Standby Generators or Dynamic UPS at AFL-SSs.
 Monitoring the status of primary power network at AFL-SSs.
 Control & Monitoring of any other auxiliary equipment as required.
 Control and monitoring of all constant current regulators (CCRs).
 Creation of operating status and alarm logs.
 Computerized single lamp control and monitoring for Runway, Exit Taxiways and Aprons
lighting systems.
 Capacity for comprehensive technical monitoring of the total airfield lighting system.
The AFLCMS shall be able to provide the following advanced conflict management functions:
 Runway Conflicts.
 Taxiway route conflicts.
 Taxiway conflicts.
 Apron/stand/Gate conflicts.
 The AFLCMS shall support recording of the operations including the operator inputs, Which shall
be able to be reconstructed for investigation purposes.
Airfield lighting devices to be controlled and monitored shall include the following:
 Approach Lighting.
 Runway End Lighting.
 Threshold Lighting.
 Runway Edge Lighting.

Technical Specifications 6-100 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI).

 Taxiway Edge Lighting.
 Aircraft Stands Maneuvering Lights.
 Stop Bar Lighting.
 Obstruction Lighting.
 Illuminated Guidance Signs
 Wind Direction Indicators.
 Integration with Advanced Surface Movement Guidance and Control System (ASMGCS),
METEO, ILS and Gate Operating System (GOS), Flight Information System and/or Airport
Operational Database System at the TAA airport. The performance requirement for integrated
system shall be as following:
 There shall be no impact on the performance of the stand-alone systems due to the interfaces
to other systems.
 The system shall be capable of meeting the following response time requirements after the
completion of integration:
 Detection of communication failure to the external systems < 1 sec.
 Acceptance of a command by HMI with intermediate status indication < 250 ms.
 Ultimate response time for the commands < 5sec [Ultimate Response Time: The maximum
time delay between the input command to the time real time status is updated on the HMI screen]
 The response time for the dynamic lighting segment control shall be less than 2 seconds.
[Used for dynamic routing functionality].
 The response time shall be applicable for all sort of commands like, Taxiway route selections,
Stop Bar/ Lead on light selections, Landing direction changes, change of lighting status and
intensity etc…
 The data update rate on the HMI screen shall be fast enough to meet the peak time and low
visibility operational requirements.
 All response time requirements are applicable to any Controller Working Position from where
the command to the external system is issued.
The AFLCMS software and hardware shall be functionally designed such that changes to the airfield lighting system
are immediately reflected on the monitors of the control and monitoring workstations (control tower, maintenance,
and AFL-SS substations). The monitors shall be capable of displaying in English text information, numerals,
symbols, and graphics. All monitors shall be capable of displaying a minimum of sixteen colors at the same time.
The AFLCMS displays shall be selectable by touch pads. The monitors shall display several pages of AFLCMS
information and graphics.
The AFLCMS shall store on disk, either in file or in the AFLCMS-Database, a log of all operations and events
within the system. Each event shall at least include unique identifier for the object or system to which the event
applies, the time stamp (in seconds) when the AFLCMS detected the event, the type of event and event specific data
relevant to the understanding of the event.
The level of events logging for every object type shall be user selectable. A browser shall be provided to view the
historical event logs maintained by AFLCMS. It shall be possible to view the event logs in both summary and
detailed form, and to filter the events viewed according to object, time stamp, event type and event specific data.
The browser shall provide the ability to print the reports showing the events currently being viewed by the browser.
The system software shall be of the open type allowing full access via special access codes to the software to allow
modifications to the software by adding or removing lighting fixtures or other components. This shall be fully
operated by the Airport Authorities who shall have the full functionality and control of the software. Training is to
be provided to staff to ensure they are fully capable of operating and reprogramming the software.
The AFLCMS shall log and report the alarms/warnings for at least, the following:
 The reported ON/OFF state of the system differs from the commanded state.

Technical Specifications 6-101 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Whenever one or more circuit reports has a critical alarm.

 Whenever the number of failed lamps or remotes exceeds the configured limit.
 Earth-Fault level-1.
 Earth-Fault level-2.
 Adjacent lamp failures.
 Lamp failures.
 Remote failures.
 Fault in a component of AFLCMS.
 Fault in a communication line of AFLCMS.
 Operational hours exceeding the threshold level.
 Circuit in local control mode.
 For every kind of discrepancy foreseen within the scope of AFLCMS.
The system shall control and monitor individual airfield lamps or groups of lamps via the power line carrier units –
or via the individual communication control cables - and remote control (RCU) I/O units. The lamp control and
monitor functions include:
 Burnt-out lamps.
 Blinking.
 On/Off.
 Current.
 Voltage.
 Open circuits.
 Short circuits.
 Location of individual or group of lamps in trouble (address, circuit number, etc…).
 Soft-start Mode.
 Fail-safe Mode.
The system shall be capable to perform automatic airfield lighting control functions. Examples of such functions
include but are not limited to:
 Controlling the brightness of regulated lighting systems.
 Changing the landing direction.
 Initiating Category I operations.
 Controlling the stop bars.
 Controlling AFL substations.
 Controlling constant current regulators (CCR) and Circuit Selector Switches (CSS).
 CRT monitor airfield graphic display with touch screen controlling.
 Controlling individual lights or groups of lights.
 Printing reports.
 Detecting aircraft position at Stop Bar locations.

6.3.2.2.1 EVENT MESSAGE CLASSIFICATION

The system shall be capable of generating and recording event transactions. An event is any operator command or
change in the status of any monitored equipment. The AFLCMS system shall be flexible as to provide the user the

Technical Specifications 6-102 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

ability to view the events and shall meet the following minimum criteria:
 Events shall not be annunciated to any part of the HMI system.
 Events shall be logged to a standard database.
 Events shall be date stamped with date and time of occurrence. The field events shall be time
stamped at source.
 Events that shall be recorded include but are not limited to the following:
 Changes in lighting system state and brightness steps.
 Changes in states of computer systems.
 Sequence of execution of commands.
 Changes in states of communication links.
 Changes in states of circuits & other monitored equipments.
 Changes in control authorizations.
 User command inputs and feedback from remote equipments.
 Changes in alarm and warning states.
 Changes in monitoring parameter values or device parameters.
Further the system shall support extensive debug logging facilities. This may be recorded in a log file instead of
writing to the database.
In order to maximize performance, the debug logging may be kept disabled during normal operation.
It shall be possible to enable debug-logging for investigation or system diagnostics. The debug log shall generate
entries for complete system transactions at all levels, which shall be configurable depending upon the requirement.

6.3.2.2.2 EVENT MESSAGE HANDLING

Event Message handling determines how the AFLCMS logs, displays, archives and purges the system events.
For events handling standard industrial database Server/Client configuration shall be employed in a redundant, fail
safe environment. The Events database shall support RDBMS & SQL standards.
The event messages shall provide a clear and concise understanding of system transactions, warnings and alarms.
All events messages shall be instantaneously logged to a central database. The database server shall support
automatic archiving/retrieval of the events to an External media.
The information such as insulation values for the circuits and the Usage hours of the lamps /controlled devices shall
be maintained in the database for at least two years for analysis.
An AFLCMS with an events storage database for storing and retrieving events shall meet, but not be limited to, the
following minimum criteria:
 Viewing – Events including warnings and alarms shall be able to be viewed via user HMI
interface.
 Subset viewing – Sub set of events, including warnings and alarms shall be able to be viewed via
subset HMI interface that allows the user to specify a date and time range to view.
 Logging – All active and cleared events shall be stored to a database designed for optimal
retrieval performance.
 Date/Time stamp - Stored events shall be stamped with the date and time of occurrence. [The field
events shall be time stamped at source before sending the same to processing computers]
 Archiving – Events shall be stored for predefined amount of time. Storage time shall be defined
by TAA- Authorities and shall be configurable.
 Back up – The AFLCMS shall provide a method (via HMI interface) for backing up event
database to external media (floppy, CD-ROM, DVD-ROMor other media).
 Purging – The AFLCMS shall provide a method (automatic or manual) for erasing the events

Technical Specifications 6-103 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

database to allow hard disk space recovery.

6.3.2.2.3 WARNINGS
A warning is an event indicating a fault condition or a low-level failure detected by the AFLCMS that has not yet
resulted in a degradation of visual aids below defined serviceability criteria. The AFLCMS shall be flexible as to
provide the user the ability to view the warning and shall meet the following criteria:
 The system shall provide the ability to classify events as warnings.
 The type of warning & the priority shall be configurable.
 The help text shall be displayed along with the warning.
 Warning shall be annunciated at maintenance/ Substation HMI interfaces.
 Warning shall not be annunciated at the ATC HMI interfaces.
 Warnings shall be logged to a database.
 Warning shall be date stamped with date & time of occurrence.
 Warnings that shall be recorded shall include but not be limited to the following:
 Low level CCR monitored items.
 Lamps out equal to warning threshold in a segment.
 Changes in states of the communication links [links up, link down].
 Fused lamps.
 UPS warnings.
 Standby Generator warnings.
 Defective remote addressable devices.
 Reach of earth fault threshold-2 (Warning).

6.3.2.2.4 ALARMS
An alarm is an event indicating a fault condition, detected by the AFLCMS that has resulted in a degradation of
Airfield Lighting System or Sub system below defined serviceability criteria according to ICAO requirements. The
AFLCMS shall be flexible as to provide the user the ability to view the alarms and shall meet the following criteria:
 The system shall provide the ability to classify events as alarms.
 The type of alarm and the priority for the alarm shall be configurable.
 Alarms shall be annunciated at maintenance HMI interfaces or any other HMI interfaces as
required.
 The help text shall be displayed along with the alarm.
 Alarms shall be annunciated at ATC HMI interfaces.
 Alarms shall be logged to a database.
 Alarms shall be stamped with date & time of occurrence.
 Alarms that shall be recorded include but are not limited to the following:
 Protective shutdown of Constant Current Regulators.
 All high level CCR monitored items.
 Annunciation of a computer malfunction, to indicate system is unable to execute lighting
control commands.
 Failure of a controlled element to respond to a commanded step. [State discrepancies].
 Loss of TANESCO power indicating system operating on standby power.
 Lamps out equal to alarm threshold.

Technical Specifications 6-104 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Standby Generator Alarms.

 UPS Alarms.
 Loss of communication links (all links down).
 System is in fail safe to indicate that the lighting circuits have switched to the systems pre-
defined fail-safe state.
 Earth fault- Threshold-1 (Alarm)
 CAT status alarms.

6.3.2.2.4.1 Audible Alarms

An audible indication of an alarm event shall be provided in conjunction with the ATC workstations. The audible
alarm modules shall be designed such that the tone can be disabled and the user can control the volume.

6.3.2.2.5 AFLCMS- Configuration Management & Generation Tools

 The system shall utilize latest software/hardware tools for the generation of the new configuration.
 The configuration database shall utilize an industrial standard RDBMS based database.
 If the industrial database cannot be utilized for the run time system, the static configuration shall
be stored in a RDBMS database and suitable application shall be utilized for generating run time
files.
 The configuration database shall be provided with a Suitable HMI application.
 The AFL As-Built drawings import function shall be supported by the configuration management
tools.
 The application shall also support graphics development tool.
 The configuration tools shall also be provided with diagnostics software to locate the errors within
the new configuration.
 The AFLCMS – Software/configuration application shall support logical statements, expressions,
functions & rule based actions.

6.3.2.2.5.1 Report Generation

The system shall be capable of generating extensive reports from current active events & from the database records.
The system shall be able to print the reports through the network printer (paper hard copy) or saved to an external
media or exported to a file of formats such as pdf, word or excel. The report shall be printed using a Laser Printer
suitable for professional/industrial environment. The report shall be able to be printed in color & at least two
report/alarm printers shall be provided in the system, of which one shall support A3 size printouts.
At the minimum, an AFLCMS shall be able to generate [but not limited] the following reports:
 Event Reports – Events, including warnings and alarms shall be able to be saved to external media
or printed to a printer.
 Subset Events Report – Subset of events, including warnings and alarms shall be able to be saved
to external media or printed to a printer.
 Constant Current Regulator report – Current status of all CCR and other controlled elements
including monitoring status shall be able to be saved to external media or printed to a printer.
 Monitoring Report – Current status of all CCR and other controlled elements including
monitoring status shall be able to be saved to external media or printed to a printer.
 Graphical Reports -Able to generate HMI printouts, Lighting Layout print out for any particular
area, Airfield Layout print outs indicating the faulty lamp/ control device locations/details etc.
 Daily reports – Generation of failed lamp list - Indicating type/model of the fixtures, location and
other relevant details.
 Tabular Insulation Resistance Report – The insulation resistance data – current or from the
database for a specific period shall be able to be saved to an external media or printed to a printer

Technical Specifications 6-105 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

in the form of a data table listing all the circuits and recorded resistance values. (The circuit name
shall be able to be selectable).
 Graphical Insulation Resistance Report – The insulation resistance data – current or from the
database for a specific period shall be able to be saved to an external media or printed to a printer
in the form of a graph showing the circuit/circuits and the graphical representation of the recorded
resistance values.
 Analysis of the usage hours for the lamps and other controlled elements in the system. Summary
and trend values for the lamp operating

6.3.2.2.6 Reliability
In the event of breakdown of the control and monitoring system, the design functions shall ensure that the status of
the airfield lighting system does not change automatically to a dangerous state. For the lighting system, the actual
brightness level shall be frozen so that there is no change in state. Other systems, especially stop bars, shall be
switched ON or OFF as appropriate to their operational requirements.
In the event of break down of the communication between the control tower and the local airfield substations, the
local AFL substation Workstation shall continue to monitor and control the AFL installations from the local AFL
substation computers.
The design redundancy for the system shall cover the basic functions. These functions are listed below:
 controller working positions at Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT),
 command processing,
 monitoring of the operational status in the electrical AFL substations,
 interfaces for CCRs (or other control units) in the electrical AFL substations, and -the
communication lines between these units.

6.3.2.2.7 Maintainability
For maintenance purposes the control and monitoring system shall fulfill the following criteria:
 Few multi-vendor hardware components.
 Off the shelf components for the working positions and management computers.
 Application of desktop equipment.
 The systems shall contain online test software for automatic failure detection and indication on
the technical working positions.

6.3.2.2.7.1 AFLCMS – Technical/Maintenance System Requirements

 The Contractor shall provide a mobile maintenance terminal capable of monitoring & controlling
the AFLCMS from the maintenance vehicles at airfield.
 The mobile maintenance terminal shall support high speed non blocking wireless communication
with the AFLCMS system network throughout the airfield.
 The Mobile terminal shall be interfaced with a GPS [DGPS – for accurate positioning of the
target] to provide location and guidance to the failed lamps, defective devices or locations of
manholes and equipments.
 The Switching of the circuits or lamps shall be possible from the maintenance terminal.
 e. The mobile maintenance terminal application shall be able to display the installed lighting
fixtures including the current status of the lighting system, technical information of CCR’S
circuits and lamps, Locations of field equipments inside the manholes etc.
 The AFLCMS shall be interfaced with the Data Acquisition system for mobile photometric testing
equipment.
 The information from the photometric system computer shall be updated to the AFCMS
maintenance management system.

Technical Specifications 6-106 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 The Contractor shall provide required Lap top Computers [with the latest configurations] for the
maintenance & administration of the AFLCMS.
 The working positions at maintenance station shall be provided with suitable console & furniture,
which shall be expandable in future to accommodate additional work stations.
 The working positions at Sub Stations shall be provided with suitable furniture.
 The AFLCMS Maintenance management system shall support the following:
 Logging & record keeping of received complaints from users.
 Assets register for the AFL – Equipments.
 Inventory System for the AFL – Spare Parts stock.
 Equipments/circuits Maintenance history cards.
 Preventive Maintenance Work Order Generation and record keeping.

6.3.2.2.8 Security Administration

The AFLCMS shall provide system-wide security administration capabilities. The system shall allow the system
administrator to establish user accounts and passwords for end users and determine each user’s level of system
authorization.
The security feature shall be able to record users who log on to the system and record events that occur during the
user’s logon period. User accounts are typically set up to be simple, yet allow only those that have been trained in
certain aspects of the system to gain access to these features.
The system wide user administration shall be possible from the central server/ client machine.
The system shall support following types of users at the minimum:
 GENERAL -general users with monitor only access.
 ATCT - operators with access to high level control & monitoring functions via graphical and push
button interfaces.
 MAINTENANCE - maintenance users with restricted command access as well as access to
monitoring interfaces & tools.
 ADMINISTRATOR - System Administrators/Developers with complete access to all system
functions, configuration and the reconfiguration of the system.

6.3.2.3 OPEN INTERFACE

The objective of the “Open Interface” is to ensure that the TAA having selected a Contractor for the AFL and
AFLCMS for TAA, is then not limited to only having to employ that Contractor for any later expansion of the TAA
AFL and AFLCMS.
To that end, the AFLCMS shall include a fully documented Open Interface, with sufficient information on its
physical and functional characteristics and protocols, to allow a third party Contractor, as part of any later expansion
of the TAA facilities, to replicate (in full) the control and monitoring functions, without recourse to the to the AFL /
AFLCMS Contractor.
The Contractor shall give a written undertaking on the following:
 It will release any copyrights and licenses necessary for a third party Contractor to replicate (in
full) the control and monitoring functions of the AFLCMS.
 It will assist any third party Contractor to replicate, in full, the control and monitoring functions or
integrating the AFL / AFLCMS into their equipment, at no cost to the TAA within three years of
project completion.

6.3.2.3.1 EXTERNAL SYSTEM INTERFACE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The proposed system shall be capable of integration with the following systems at TAA Airport to achieve the
functionalities as described in the subsequent sections:
 Meteorological System (METEO),

Technical Specifications 6-107 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Instrument Landing System (ILS),

 Gate Operating System (GOS), and
 Flight Information System (FIDS) or Airport Operational Database System (AODS).
The AFLCMS manufacturer/contractor shall prepare all necessary Interface Control documents for integration with
external systems.
The AFLCMS contractor shall finalize the Interface Control Document in coordination with Engineer, Client and
representatives from external system manufacturer/contractor.
The latest Asterisk format of interface shall be utilized wherever it is feasible.
The contractor shall include in its scope all hardware & software which will be required for the integration with
external systems.
Functions shall be configurable according to the tasks to be performed by the user.
A comprehensive event-logging feature to track/monitor/ diagnose the data flow from one system to the other shall
be made available.
In case of a system failure/ malfunctioning/communication failure, the stand-alone system shall function
independently with no change in operational status of the system.
The functionalities described here shall work with respect to the operational concepts set by the TAA Airport
Authorities.
All communication links to the external systems shall be redundant.
The original functionalities of the stand-alone system shall remain unaffected.
The Integrated ATC - HMI Interface shall fulfill the following requirements:
 Permit rapid situation assessment.
 Employ user friendly and familiar data entry means.
 Minimise the number of input actions required.
 Permit the user to make the decisions on those actions for which he/she is responsible.
 Maintain a balance between human and machine functions.
 Ensure a level of user workload, which is consistent with efficient and effective activity.
 Permit full manual operation in the event of a failure of an automatic function or whenever
manual operation is required.
 Be harmonised where possible with other existing ATM HMI.
 Immediately forward alerts to users in the event of a failure or when system performance
degrades.

6.3.2.3.2 THE EXPECTED ENHANCED A-SMGCS FUNCTIONS:

The AFLCMS system shall be capable of interfacing with the A-SMGCS system to allow a fully enhanced operation
of the A-SMGCS under low visibility conditions, all components that are related to the AFL and which are needed
for such interfacing are to be a part of the AFLCMS works, the functions expected are as follows:
Provision of an overview picture of the Air traffic situation around the movement area based on the radar- data
obtained through ALCS-GMR interface on a separate layer [Surveillance track information].
Display of advanced Runway conflict alerts derived from GMR, leading to visual & audible alerts.
Display of Impending arrival window near the threshold of the active runway in the traffic situation screen.
Runway occupancy update on the HMI based on the GMR & Loop sensor data.
Provision for the manual release of the runway occupancy, in case of malfunctioning of the automatic update.
Display of aircraft track/code/call sign/ type/parking bay/velocity.
Display weather data [(e.g. visibility, RVR, QNH, Wind conditions & several other parameters) in a separate MET

Technical Specifications 6-108 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Window.
Generate system prompt for setting recommendations at weather changes, based on the meteorological data inputs to
AFL system.
Display the RVR values for the Runway on the HMI screen.
Display of Wind data [at each sensor] & QNH values on the AFL HMI screen.
The control of the lead-in light direction to the stand based on the direction of the arriving aircraft.
Ability to switch off stand- lead-in lights based on the Park-On status from VDGS.
Ability to update the stand occupied status on the HMI screen based on the Park-On status from VDGS.
On loosing the track of an aircraft it shall be possible to allocate the label from GMR- lost label list.
System status data. [ e.g lost communication to GMR/VDGS/MET systems.]
The status of the Instrument Landing, sub systems shall be displayed on the AFL HMI screen. [e.g. Glide slope,
localizer, middle marker etc.]
The change of Landing Direction shall activate the respective Instrument Landing System & Deactivate the
instrument Landing System in the opposite direction.
Verification of the routes for separation criteria under various categories of operation [X & Y directions], Aircraft
type compatibility on the taxiway. [Derived from GMR data + A- SMGCS algorithms]
Ability to show track history symbols, state vectors etc. as appropriate.
Mode of movement information [e.g. push back, taxi, hold]
Assignment of routes to the aircrafts & dynamic control of the Taxiway lighting segments for the selected route.
Planning information [e.g. sorted lists of arrivals, departures, vehicles, flight plans].
Runway /Taxiway status information [e.g. Closed, Active etc.].
Viewing of Flight Plan and Electronic Flight Strips.
The label input, confirmation & assignment out of a departure or arrival list.
Provide alerts for route deviations and recommend actions.

6.3.2.4 SINGLE LAMP CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM

The functions of the single lamp control and monitoring subsystem shall serve to switch and monitor individual
lamps integrated into the series circuits of the airfield lighting systems of the Runway, Exit Taxiways and Aprons.
It shall be capable to mix the operation of passive (not switched or not monitored) and active lamp units in one
lighting circuit.
The functions of the single lamp control system shall be capable for control purposes with supplementary lamp
failure monitoring of the controlled lamps, or as a monitoring system only.
In addition to the information on the number of failed lamps, the precise location of the failure shall be indicated.
This function shall comply with the ICAO Annex 14 recommendation for monitoring lamp failures.
The system shall perform reliably; and the response time shall meet the requirement without any cross talk
problems.
The single lamp control and monitoring subsystem shall function as one control unit in the electrical substation and
as individual control units at the lamps.
The Remote Control Unit shall function as a receiver interface to the switching commands from the control and
monitoring system, shall control the individual lighting components and shall coordinate control of the constant
current regulator (CCR) and transmission of data to the field devices. It receives information on the operational
status of the lamps from the field devices and processes it and passes this information on to the control and
monitoring system.
For every lamp equipped with the Remote Control Unit the AFLCMS shall, as a minimum, monitor and report the
following data:
 Commanded (ON/OFF) state of the lamp.

Technical Specifications 6-109 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Actual (ON/OFF) state of the lamp, as reported by the remote device.

 Lamp failure.
 Failure of the remote unit.
 For the dual channel remotes, same information shall be available for both channels.
 For every lamp with the remote control device, the AFLCMS shall provide ON/OFF control of
the outputs.
 The MTBF for the remote unit shall be very high and suitable third party certificate shall be
submitted to prove the same.
The following attributes for the remote control device shall be configurable from the AFLCMS:
 Steady or flashing operation.
 For flashing operation, the frequency and the duty cycle of the flashing.
 Default power up state.
 Fail safe mode (which shall be either OFF/ON or last recent state).
 The address and all other operational configuration for the device.
For every lamp, the AFLCMS shall track the number of usage hours at each intensity level. The usage hours shall be
stored in a persistent storage and possible to reset the values to at any time. A warning indication shall be triggered
whenever the effective usage (summation of the usage at every intensity level) exceeds a user specified threshold.
The field device (Remote Control Unit) at the lamp shall function in two versions. The first serves one individual
lamp. The second can control and monitor two lamps fed from one transformer.
The field device (Remote Control Unit) shall be interposed between the isolating transformer and the lamp itself.
The unit shall be completely sealed to IP68. Connection cables with connector kits plugs shall be used for
interconnecting the lamp and transformer.
The main functions of the Single Lamp Control and Monitoring system shall be as following:
 Transmission of data between the unit in the AFL substation and the components in the field shall
take place through the series circuit power cable or via individual communication control cables.
 The data protocol for field communications shall comply with the following requirements:
 Fast reaction time
 Reliable transmission by the use of separate frequencies with high energy including an error
detection, correction and repeating of the transmission functions.
 Polling procedure controlled and coordinated via the main unit in the substation.
 The communication to (RCU) I/O units shall be based on separate addresses to each unit.
 For ease of handling the system, each field unit shall have a unique address corresponding to the
serial number of the component. This assures that there is definitely no more than one unit with
the same hardware address.
 The configuration of the control and monitoring system shall contain several hardware addresses
and also the position and the dedicated CCR for each (RCU) I/O unit.
 For a fast communication during the operation of the system all (RCU) I/O units shall have
additional operational addresses. These addresses shall be unique addresses in order of the units
integrated in the same segment and shall be used as group addresses. RCU units in each segment
shall have the same operation address, i.e. the group address. The use of group addresses shall
allow the control of all lights in the same section by using only one command.
 Each (RCU) I/O unit shall have a fail safe condition which has effect in the case of a
communication fault or after power on at the series circuit cable. The conditions shall be ON,
OFF or the last operational status.
 The operational addresses and also the fail safe condition of each field device shall be
automatically and remotely programmed from the control and monitoring system via data down

Technical Specifications 6-110 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

load through the series circuit cable.

 The control shall be used for each individual lamp or for a group of lamps. Lamps shall be
switched off by short circuiting the output of the RCU to the lamps.
Monitoring of the Individual Lamps:
 The functions, ON, OFF, LAMP FAILURE, RCU FAULT shall be checked and reported by the
(RCU) I/O unit for each lamp.
 Lamp failure shall be detected by a combined current and voltage measurement that ensures that
both, filament breaks and short-circuits, are recognized by the (RCU) I/O units.
 In the event of lamp failure, the switch condition “OFF” shall be output by the integrated
switching element. This short-circuit prevents the high voltage spikes on the secondary side of
the lamp transformer that usually accompany lamp failure.

6.3.2.4.1 System Response Time

Response time [Definition]: The maximum time delay between the input commands to the time real time status is
updated on the HMI screen].

6.3.2.4.1.1 Single Command Response Time

For lighting system such as Stop Bars, within 2 seconds from the activation of the command at Tower the lights
shall be switched ON or OFF at field and the real-time status from the field shall be updated onto the HMI screen.

6.3.2.4.1.2 Multi Segment/ Multiple lighting System commands

Multi Segment/section [Group of lights] response time shall be less 5 second irrespective of the number of segments
or the size [number of lamps in the segment] of the segment. This response time shall be consistent throughout the
system.
For dynamic taxiway routing segments [varying blocks of lights] the above time shall be < 2 sec.
The landing direction change over shall also take place in < 5 seconds.

6.3.2.4.1.3 Aircraft/Vehicle detection sensor Response Time

The time to detect and update the incursion alarm onto the HMI shall be < 1 sec.

6.3.2.4.1.4 Other Response Times

 Command input until acceptance or rejection - < 0.5 sec.
 From command input until control signal output to regulator or other Controlled unit. < 1.0 sec.
 Switchover time to redundant components in the event of system faults (no command execution
during this time) < 0.5 sec
 Automatic detection of failed lamps/units. < 5.0 sec.
 Selection of objects on HMI screen [Using navigator or going to the Navigator-Object from AFL-
Layout HMI). < 2 sec.
 Complete Restart of the User Interface Workstations [ATC /Maintenanance] [Including uptime
for AFLCMS Application] – < 3 mins.
NOTE: The response time shall remain the same irrespective of the expansion of the system.

6.3.2.5 TAXIWAY SYSTEM CONTROL AND MONITORING

The AFLCMS shall control and monitor the following Taxiway Lighting System: [The list of lighting systems that
will be controlled and monitored by the AFLCMS must be consistent with the list shown previously.
 Taxiway edge lighting
 Stop bar lighting
 Taxiway guidance signs
 Intermediate Holding Position Lights

Technical Specifications 6-111 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.3.2.5.1 Taxiway Routing

The AFLCMS-Configuration database shall maintain a definition for each routing point (Hot Spots).
In addition to the static configuration of segments between routing points, AFLCMS will maintain a Dynamic
database of user-defined routes.
Each route will consist of a group of segments and/or controlled point, starting at the origin routing point and ending
with the destination routing point (direction is considered by the ordering of the points). The operator by selecting
the start and end points shall have a route which satisfies the path needed with no conflict with other areas.
Only one route between any two end points must be stored although an option is to allow the storage of more than
one route.
It will be possible for route BC to follow different points than route CB.

6.3.2.5.1.1 Taxiway routing functions in two different modes.

6.3.2.5.1.1.1 Selector mode

AFLCMS accepts the input of a starting and ending hot spot by the operator. If these points represent a valid route
from the database, the AFLCMS will provide an indication by flashing the route on the display and prompting for
confirmation. If the user confirms, AFLCMS turns ON the segments that comprise the paths between the points of
the route. If a route is already ON, then it turns OFF.

6.3.2.5.1.1.2 Planning mode

AFLCMS accepts input of the hot spots leading in order from the origin to the destination. For each leg selected,
indication will flash the route up to the current end point. After the route has been planned, the operator will have
the option of ‘applying’ the route which will cause AFLCMS to turn ON the segments that comprise the path
between the points of the route. If the operator saves the route, then AFLCMS will store this route in database
overwriting any existing route between the same end points.

6.3.2.5.2 Stop Bar Operation

6.3.2.5.2.1 General
The automatic stop bar system shall include microware sensors and/or detection loops which shall follow up on the
aircrafts traffic. The purpose of automatic detection shall be to prevent several airplanes moving simultaneously on
the runway from causing grid lock. For this reason, the taxiway exits shall be supplied with stop bar systems. In the
switched on condition the system shall signal the pilot with a clear stop signal. To indicate to the controller in the
tower at which position airplanes at the taxiways are waiting, the areas before the stop bar shall be supervised by a
sensor. The controller shall be capable of switching off a stop bar. If the airplane is crossing the stop bar area, it
shall be detected by a second sensor. This signal shall switch the stop bar lights automatically on. In the event an
aircraft is crossing an active stop bar without clearance, this incursion sensor shall trigger an alarm in the tower.
A third sensor at the end of the taxiway shall signals the tower that the airplane has passed the stop bar area.

6.3.2.5.2.2 Operation
Besides the exit taxiways, the entry taxiways shall be secured against prohibited exit. Each sensor shall have its own
direction detection. In addition, a classification in four groups (vehicle, small, medium and heavy airplanes) as well
as a rough speed-information shall be given to the Control and Monitoring System.
The AFLCMS shall utilize the aircraft position inputs from the Induction Loop Sensors (placed at strategic locations
described here under and as shown on the drawings) and ATC operator inputs to effect automatic control of the
stopbars. Ultimately, the tracking of the aircrafts and the control of the relevant inset lights shall be also confirmed
by the Ground Movement Radar (GMR)/AFLCMS integration.
For each stop bar, AFLCMS shall monitor four distinct vehicle positions: HOLD (waiting in front of the stop bar),
INCURSION (crossing the stop bar), PROCEED (clearance of the stop bar security zone) and DEPART (clearance
of the stop bar area). The AFLCMS shall provide graphical feedback to the operators showing the presence of
aircrafts at any monitored positions.
In the default (active) state, the stop bar lights shall be lit, and the two sections of leadon lights shall be
extinguished. Upon receiving a ‘cycle’ request from the ATC operator, the AFLCMS shall turn off the stop bar
lights while turn on the lead-on lights.

Technical Specifications 6-112 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

When the aircraft reaches the PROCEED sensor the stop bar goes active and extinguish the first set of lead-on
lights. Once the aircraft passes, the DEPART sensor the AFLCMS shall extinguish the remaining lead-on lights.
In order to maximize the level of safety, the stop bar operation shall also be configured through the timer wherein, if
the indication from the sensors is not reached within a defined timeout period, the stop bar shall go active and lead-
on lights shall be extinguished.
If an aircraft crosses the incursion sensor while the stop bar is on, the AFLCMS shall trigger an alarm to the ATC
operator.
The AFLCMS shall provide both individual and group activation/de-activation of the stop bars.
The control and monitoring of the taxiway stop bars shall be from the airport control tower controller working
positions for the runways and the taxiways dependent on TAA’s assignment.

6.3.2.5.2.3 Taxiway Edge Lighting

Taxiway edge lights shall be controlled through a global control [ON/OFF] button.
A single global intensity setting shall control the intensity of the taxiway edge lighting.

6.3.2.5.2.4 Taxiway Guidance Signs

The AFLCMS shall control and monitor all illuminated guidance signs.

6.3.2.6 OPERATOR/ CONTROLLER INTERFACES (HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - HMI)

ATC operator interfaces shall present only the information essential for safe, ergonomic and efficient operation of
the Airfield Lighting. Unnecessary details shall be suppressed to minimize ATC operator workload and distraction.
It shall be possible to obtain additional technical information at all operator-working positions.
All working positions within the system shall be identically configured so that all functions can be performed at any
workstation. The configuration and the operating parameters of every component of the AFLCMS shall be stored in
a database. There shall be a provision to maintain multiple copies of the configuration database and to specify which
database will be used at startup of the system.

6.3.2.6.1 Requirements for Operator Interfaces (HMI)

 Graphic representation of the Airfield on the user screen to show the configuration and location of
all available Airfield Lighting subsystems by using a real scaled map of the airport.
 Indication of the status of every Airfield Lighting subsystem as well as its condition in the airport
map.
 Indication of the faulty lamps including the location of the lamps in the airport map.
 Display of the detailed information by clicking with a mouse pointer on the symbol of the airfield
lighting system in the airport map.
 Graphic representation of the control and monitoring system to show the configuration of all
components of the system.
 Indication of the condition of all components of the control and monitoring system in the graphic
display.
 Browser for an easy access of all technical detailed information. The browser shall show the tree
with the hardware structure of the airfield lighting system for every element of the tree (e.g.,
Circuit, CCR, Lamp, Remote Control Unit, etc…).
 Ability of all graphical displays to zoom in and out and to scroll the display at higher
magnification. The HMI display shall be vector based and shall support extensive zooming
without losing quality or resolution.
 Wherever possible the operator interfaces shall present realistic graphical depictions of the current
state of the lighting system. These depictions shall show the ON/OFF status and the intensity of
all lighting components. The intensity shall be depicted as different shades of the same color.
Brightness step settings shall be indicated by text on the associated buttons.
 The colors used for the states such as alarms, warnings, maintenance, out of service etc. shall be

Technical Specifications 6-113 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

coordinated with TAA- authorities.

 A color legend shall be able to be displayed to indicate color representation.
 The legend colors utilized for the lighting systems shall be real-time as far as possible.
 Various shades of colors shall be able to be used to indicate the change of runway & taxiway
lighting brightness steps.
 The HMI utilized for the AFLCMS shall be harmonious with ATM Systems.
 The system shall provide suitable function to prevent unintentional actuation of the lighting
system or sub-system.
 The HMI shall support multiple layers freely configurable for the usage as required.
 All lighting system status update onto the HMI shall be real-time based on the feedback from the
field devices. Optimistic update on the HMI is not allowed under any circumstances.
The control of the lighting system shall be limited to one Operator Workstation at any given time. Each operator
workstation shall allow the user (with required privilege such as ATC or ADMINISTRATOR level access) to
request control at that station with a single operation. A request for control shall immediately transfer control to that
station and away from any station currently possessing control.

6.3.2.6.2 Controller Working Positions (ATC Station)

The Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) shall be equipped with two PC based workstations. The control commands
shall be performed by means of mimic diagrams to allow the viewing of the different states of the system.
 The operating commands shall be done using a touch sensitive screen.
 The physical communication media shall be Ethernet with the TCP/IP protocol.
 Each ATC Workstation shall include, as a minimum :
 One Desktop PC with 64 bit Intel Xeon Processor, 3.8 GHZ, 1GB RAM , 120GB Hard Disk,
 3 ½ “ Floppy Drive, 16X DVD Read, 52 X DVD ROM, or a higher performance if needed by
the system.
 The latest version of Windows x64 Professional or equivalent.
 LCD – TFT Monitor – 21 inch.
 Dual Network Cards.
 Every ATC Work Station shall be supplemented with a Touch Screen [LCD] of size 14 “to
accommodate the Fast Reaction Panel Function.
 Fast Reaction Panel is an operator panel consisting of Lighting Control Buttons, which allows
ATC to perform quick control of the lighting System states through touch buttons.
 [The above specifications are indicative and the latest configuration available in the market
shall be considered]
 The Visual Aids Control System equipment in the ATC Tower shall be supplied with aback-up
power supply. This Uninterruptible Power Supply shall have minimum 10 minutes autonomy.
 • ATC display shall be focused on operational aspects of the system. Technical information, not
needed for operating the system, shall not be shown on ATC screen. Information on ATC screen
shall be presented in a manner so as to reduce workload. Touch screens shall be used as the prime
source of HMI in tower displays. Using touch screen gives a fast and intuitive user interface and
control facilities with minimum space in the tower panel.
 Change in facilities shall be possible by a change in the software only (no mechanical rebuild of
panel)
 The equipment status shall be displayed on a geographically correct status screen.
 Using geographically correct status screen with good zoom facilities for equipment and light
status gives a fast and secure overview of airfield status. It enables the possibility for future GPS
or radar supported tracking of moving objects on the ground.

Technical Specifications 6-114 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 ATC control shall give the operator the possibility to control all equipment individually. By a
single command, the system shall be able to control series of actions to support the operational
procedures of the airport (change from CAT I to CAT II, etc...), in order to reduce workload of the
operator and insure correct sequence of the operations.
 Based on the technical status of the equipment in the airport, the system shall be able to inform
the operator of the possible modes of operations for the airport (CAT I, Low Visibility, etc...).

6.3.2.6.3 Touch Screen Requirements

Touch screen interface shall have the following minimum HMI graphics requirements:
 A clear screen button shall be provided to prevent accidental actuation of circuits while cleaning
the screen.
 Touch Buttons or touch sensitive areas shall be of sufficient width & height to prevent touching of
more than one button at a time.
 Separation between the touch buttons or touch sensitive areas shall be sufficient to prevent
inadvertent pressing of buttons.
 A calibrate touch screen button shall be provided for the calibration process of the touch screen.

6.3.2.6.4 Controller Working Positions for the Runway and Taxiway Lighting
 A mimic diagram displayed on the workstations shall be used to control and monitor the airfield
ground lighting. The operator shall be able to call up pop-up windows to control lights according
to their type.
 The mimic diagram views shall be made up of three parts: the status panel, the control panel and
the mimic diagram.
 The Status Panel in the upper part shall be used to indicate the main information such as :
 The selected category
 The serviceability of the categories
 The selected runway direction and operational mode
 Password
 The Control Panel in the lower window shall consist of “soft” buttons (graphic representations of
buttons which appear on the display) and shall be used to modify a status (the category for
example) or to call for a facility pop-up.
 The Mimic Diagram in the middle window shall be used to monitor the airfield ground lighting.
Lights shall be monitored and their status shall be reflected at all times in each Mimic Diagram
view. Specific lights shall also be controlled in each Mimic Diagram view through the use of the
“soft” buttons which shall include the following orders :
 The runway direction
 The operation mode (arrival and/or departure)
 The stop bars (individually)
 Group adjustment of light intensity
 Text on the button shall change colors when selected and pop-up windows shall appear to confirm
or cancel the selection. No response within 15 seconds shall automatically cancel the order.
 All active operational alarms (critical) shall be monitored on the AMC and GMC workstations.
 The different views displayed on the monitors shall be the following :

6.3.2.6.4.1 Airfield view

It shall be a global view of the entire airport where the lights can be monitored and set to a PRESET value. The
preset value depends on the selected runway direction, category and mode.
From this view, the operator shall have the capability to zoom in on certain parts of the airfield.

Technical Specifications 6-115 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.3.2.6.4.2 Runway view

It shall be a detailed view of the runway and approach zones with all taxiways leading onto the runway. All lights
therein shall be able to be controlled (ON, OFF or preset value) and monitored from this view.

6.3.2.6.4.3 Taxiway zooms

The controller shall have the possibility to control and monitor the different taxiways and stop bars (other than those
at the taxi-holding positions). The different facilities shall be able to be turned ON, OFF or set to their preset value.

6.3.2.6.4.4 Alarm view

The alarm view shall display all the active alarms on the system. This shall include lights that are out of order,
defective communication links and materials that have broken down.
 All of the luminous visual aids shall be controlled and monitored from the supplied control
system.
 Some circuits shall be turned on and off in segments. However, the lights that are controlled by
an Addressable Control System shall be monitored separately to ensure compliance with ICAO
standards for CAT I operation.
 All of the luminous visual aids shall be under control from the visual aids control system as
shown below:
 From the AMC and GMC computers:
Lights such runway edge, PAPI systems, etc. shall be controlled and monitors i.e. by turning on or off all the lights
at the same time and monitoring the whole group as well as indications from the CCR.
Specific lights such as stop bars and leadin-tawiway lights, on one or more circuit groups to be powered by their
respective CCR’s, shall be turned on or off in segments and monitored for faults or others.
The classification of the control system for the airpoirt can be summarized as follows:
Runway lighting Addressable control
Runway/edge lighting Addressable control
Stop bars Addressable control
Rapid exit Addressable control
Approach lighting Addressable control
Taxiway lighting Group (selector switch) control
Taxiway edge lighting Group (direct) control
Lead in lighting Addressable control
Intermediate Holding Position Lighting Group (selector switch) control

6.3.2.6.5 Training/Simulator Workstations

The AFLCMS shall be provided with a simulator/training PC with a similar configuration to that of the ATC
controller. The PC shall be either linked to the system or separately operated. The PC shall serve as follows:
 Either can be used for training purpose of ATC controllers,
 or for testing of newly configured database to check for errors and reliability.
The operation of the above requirements shall occur with absolutely no interference or disturbance to the existing
installations and the airport operation. The simulation shall be realistic as if the PC is in real control of the airfield
installations. Commands, errors, faults, etc… shall be reported as if the PC is controlling the airport. The simulation
shall provide aircrafts movement, landing, take off, and taxiing as in real life operation.

6.3.2.6.6 Technical Working Positions (Maintenance Station)

The Maintenance Base shall be equipped with a supervision workstation which must serve as an archive for alarms
and events in order of occurrence and must print reports according to different criteria.
In addition to the taxiway control views, the engineering interface shall provide realistic and detailed graphical

Technical Specifications 6-116 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

depictions of the state of all lighting systems. These graphical views shall include:
 Detailed taxiway segment views, showing location, type, etc…of every lighting component part
of the particular segment.
 Substation floor plans showing the status of the lighting equipments.
 System overview showing the status of all AFLCMS components.
It shall be possible to examine any object represented in the graphical views by selecting the object and launching a
detailed viewer. This detailed viewer shall present the entire state of the object as well as an interface for individual
control of the object.
 Maintenance interface shall provide the ability to view detailed and scaled airfield layout, which
shows the position and status of failed lamps and remote units with all details.
The maintenance interface shall provide the hierarchical browsing of the static and dynamic state of the lighting
system.
 It shall be possible to view the status of the communications equipment in the AFLCMS network
at the Engineering workstation.
 It shall be possible to create filtered views of sets of airfield lighting objects summarizing the
current operational status of those objects. It shall be possible to filter these sets based on static
(configuration) parameters as well as on the current operational alarm and warning status of the
objects.
 The interface shall provide summary of all active alarm and warning conditions within the system,
and it shall filter these lists by alarm type, object type, and time stamp. It shall be possible to print
the reports showing object status and alarm summaries.
 There shall be a provision to set the Airfield Lighting Objects, both logical and physical, in to
following types of states: (by ADMINISTRATOR level access user)
 MAINTENANCE - The items can be controlled by the ATC user as well as the user with
MAINTENANCE access. (Ref. Security Levels for description).
 IN SERVICE - This is the default state for every object. Only the ATC user and the
ADMINISTRATOR level access user can have the control over the objects.
 OUT OF SERVICE -No user has the control over the object until the ADMINISTRATOR
level access user sets the object back into IN SERVICE or MAINTENANCE mode.
 While the objects are in MAINTENANCE mode, same shall be identified on HMI with a proper
color. When an object is in OUT OF SERVICE mode, this has to be indicated on HMI screen
with a proper color.
 The closed portion of the Taxiways shall be able to be updated onto the HMI with a proper
indication.
 Each technical Work Station shall include, as a minimum:
 One Desktop PC with 64 bit Intel Xeon Processor, 3.8 GHZ, 1GB RAM , 120GB Hard Disk,
 3 ½ “Floppy Drive, 16X DVD Read/Write of highest speed in the market, Optical mouse,
keyboard, or a higher performance if needed by the system.
 The latest version of Windows x64 Professional or equivalent.
 LCD – TFT Monitor – 21 inch.
 Dual Network Cards.
 Laser Printer. [Professional]
 DAT Drive with appropriate Backup Software.
 [The above specifications are indicative and the latest configuration available in the market
shall be considered]
 The Maintenance Base workstation shall be supplied through an Uninterruptible Power Supply
with minimum 15 minutes autonomy if not available from the local power supply network within

Technical Specifications 6-117 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

the airport.
 This working position shall include maintenance staff positions that provide access to all relevant
detail information of the airfield lighting system. The technical working positions shall contain
the following functions:
 The graphic representation of the airport to show the configuration and location of all
available airfield lighting subsystems by using a real scaled map of the airport. The colors that
represent the lights shall be as close as practicable to the real ones.
 Indication of the on/off status of each airfield lighting subsystem, as well as its condition (for
example: on, off, fault, etc…) in the airport map.
 Indication of fault lamps including the location of the lamps in the airport map for all lamps
covered by the single lamp monitoring system.
 Indication of two or more faulty lamps in sequence including the location of the lamps in the
airport map for all lamps covered by the single lamp monitoring system.
 Display of detail information by clicking with the mouse pointer on the symbol of the airfield
lighting system in the airport map.
 Graphic representation of the control and monitoring system to show the configuration of all
components of the system.
 Indication of the condition of all components of the control and monitoring system (for
example: properly working, etc...). In the graphic display.
 Browser for an easy access of all technical detail information. The browser shall show a tree
with the hardware structure of the airfield lighting system. For every element of the tree (e.g.,
CCR, lamp, circuit, etc...). The operator can open an information window with all detail
information of the dedicated hardware.
 Print of predefined reports.
The following detail information shall be available in the airfield lighting system and the control and
monitoring system. This shall include also the location and type of the lamps covered by the single lamp
monitoring system.
 Operational status of all airfield lighting systems (ON, OFF, FAULT).
 Operation hours for all circuits at each intensity stage.
 Operation hours for all individual monitored lamps at each intensity stage.
 Actual current in the circuit (for the circuits equipped with the lamp monitoring system).
 Operational status for the component of the control and monitoring system.
 Operational status for the communication system of the control and monitoring system.
 Fault of an airfield lighting system.
 Fault of an individual airfield lighting circuit.
 Number of faulty lamps of an airfield lighting system pass the alarm threshold.
 Two faulty lamps in sequence in a single lamp monitored system.
 Insulation value of an airfield lighting circuit pass the alarm threshold.
 Operation hours of an airfield lighting circuit pass the alarm threshold.
 Fault of a component of the control and monitoring system.
 Fault of a communication line of the control and monitoring system.
 All faults of the airfield lighting system.
 All faults of the control and monitoring system .
 All control commands for the airfield lighting system (optional).
 Release for local control.

Technical Specifications 6-118 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Changes of the system configuration.

 Changes of an alarm threshold.
 All recorded events shall be marked with a time stamp.
 The evaluation of statistical data processing shall be carried out at this working place.
 A window with a software control panel for controlling the airfield lighting system shall be
provided
 To get the access for the local control of one or more airfield lighting systems the technician shall
mark the concerned airfield lighting systems at the technical working position and send a request
for the local control to the tower working position. The controller can accept or reject the request.
If he accepts the local control, the concerned systems shall be marked in the airport map on the
monitor at the controller working positions.
 The graphics screen shall contain context sensitive on-line help for every function. Both
operation and displays shall be designed for personnel who lack computer training, and are thus
suitable for immediate deployment in the maintenance departments.
 The operator shall call up detailed information from the database by clicking the mouse on the
lighting elements in the graphic image or by entering search codes on the keyboard. The detailed
information shall be displayed in list and mask form.
 In addition to the workstation monitor, the equipment shall include a printer for producing a
chronological record of operations, for printing work lists or for analyzing the records.
 In addition to the above described functions, the technical working position shall provide all
functions of the local control units located in the substations.

6.3.2.6.7 Local Control in the Substation and Field Sensors

 The local control and monitoring system shall provide a local control unit in each electrical
substation.
 Each working position consists of:
 -One desktop PC with Pentium IV, 3.6 GHZ processor. (or equivalent to the latest version of
speed at the delivery time)
 -21” high-resolution color monitor.
 -1.0GB DDR2 ECC SD RAM, 3.5” floppy, and one 16X DVD Read/ Write, 52X CD ROM-
R.W along with a DVD –R/W
 -Mouse and keyboard.
 -Supervisor software package consisting of the latest version of Windows or similar and the
associated applications software.
 -Associated software licenses.
 -Two Ethernet adapters (dual LAN).
 Commands shall be entered and information presented using a monitor, a keyboard and a mouse.
The screen and information display shall be graphically integrated in the airport system diagram.
 The following control functions shall be integrated in the local control facility:
 Changeover-Local/Remote
 The local control can be set either for the whole station or partially for individual systems or
regulators. The local control cannot be activated until authorized either by the tower controller or
by a correct password input. Return of control to remote does not require towers authorization or
a password.
 System control
 Control of the complete lighting system like approach, taxiway segments, etc…

Technical Specifications 6-119 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Section control
 Regulator control
 Each regulator can be switched independently of the system and section control
 Lamp control
 At the local control, the following information on the operational status of the system shall be
available:
 Overview of the switched condition of all the systems in the station.
 Overview of all the technical information and data on a circuit, available in the station.
 Overview of all the technical information and data on a section, available in the station.
 Overview of all the technical information and data on a lamp, available in the station.
 Lamp failure data relating to a circuit and the section of a circuit.
 Overview of the actual status of the local control of all sections.
 In order to simplify the coordination of maintenance work, a portable maintenance terminal
(laptop) shall be available within the maintenance station.
 The portable maintenance terminal shall provide the user with direct access to the control of
systems, regulators and individual lamps. Monitoring results can be called up individually from
the portable unit.
 In order to prevent unauthorized access to the lighting system, the systems in question must have
already been switched to “LOCAL” for the maintenance work before the portable maintenance
terminal can be activated.
 The equipment in the substations shall contain:
 Redundant station management computer.
 Gateways to a redundant station bus.
 Redundant station bus designed for the operation in the harsh environment of the airfield
lighting substation.
 Local control unit for the control and monitoring of the CCRs and the single lamp monitoring
system.
 Interfaces to connect the peripheral equipment (e.g. CCR) via the redundant station bus to the
control and monitoring system.
 Parallel I/O.
 Analogue/digital inputs and outputs.
 Single lamp control interface.
 Serial (RS485) interface.
 CCRs feeding a circuit equipped with a single lamp control and monitoring devices shall be
connected to a single lamp control interface. This interface shall provide a parallel I/O for the
control and monitoring signals of the CCR (ON, OFF, brilliancy setting, and back indication) and
the communication interface via a high voltage series circuit coupling device to the field devices.
 All other CCRs shall be connected to the parallel I/O interface of the control and monitoring
system.
 To reach a high reliability of airfield lighting systems fed by interleaving circuits the CCRs shall
be connected to independent single lamp control or parallel I/O interfaces. Each of these
interfaces shall be separately linked to the redundant station bus. Thus, a fault of one interface
shall not have influence on the function of the other CCRs of the same airfield lighting system.

6.3.2.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

Technical Specifications 6-120 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.3.2.7.1 Central Processing Units (CPUs) and Computers

Minimum specification requirements /features shall include the following:
 Type: 64 bit Intel – Xeon
 Processor Clock Rate: 3.8 GHz.
 Random Access Memory (RAM): 1.0 GB, ECC DDR2.
 Hard Drive: 120 GB.
 Disk Drive: 3.5” Floppy and 16X DVD, read/write (R/RW) and 52 C CD-ROM – RW along with
DVD-R/W Drive.
 Communications: 100/ 1000 MBPS – Dual Network Cards.

6.3.2.7.2 LCD Color Monitors

Minimum specification requirements/features shall include the following:
 For ATC-Display
 LCD - TFT
 Resolution - 1600 X 1200
 Viewable Image – 21 “
 Platform –the latest version of Windows or equivalent.
 High Brightness & High Contrast
 High Dimming ratio – Suitable for operation under bright day light & dimmed night
conditions.
 Suitable for mounting on ATC console.
 For Maintenance-/Technical Position Display
 LCD-TFT
 Resolution – 1600 X 1200
 Viewable Image – 21”
 Platform –the latest version of Windows or equivalent.

6.3.2.7.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS):

Minimum specification requirements/features shall include the following:
 Type: No-break, computer-grade power.
 Protection: ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category B.
 Spike Attenuation: 60 dB.
 Regulation: ± 3 percent.
 Battery: Sealed (Maintenance Free).

6.3.2.7.4 Printer
Minimum specification requirements/features shall include the following:
 Type: Laser. [Professional]
 Protocol: TCP / IP.

6.3.2.7.5 Remote Control (RCU) I/O Unit

Minimum specification requirements/features shall include the following:
 Type: Intelligent Input / Output (I/O) Airfield Unit.

Technical Specifications 6-121 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Typical Applications: Airfield lighting control and monitoring via circuit power cables.

6.3.2.7.6 HARDWARE DESIGN VERSION CONTROL:

The AFLCMS hardware design, including assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, layout drawings, context diagrams,
network diagrams and bill of materials shall be kept under appropriate version control by the AFLCMS
manufacturer. Hardware design version control shall meet the following minimum requirements:
 AFLCMS manufacturer shall have established ISO-9002 certified documentation control
procedures.
 The AFLCMS hardware shall be designed using common commercial computer aided design
packages.
 All AFLCMS drawings shall be tracked based on date of changes.
 All AFLCMS drawing shall be stored electronically. [On the network]
 All AFLCMS design drawings shall utilize English language.

6.3.2.8 AIRFIELD LIGHTING CONTROL NETWORK

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a complete fast ETHERNET networking, hubbing, switching, control
and monitoring design, detailed drawings, and minimum specifications of the entire powerline, copper cable and
optical fiber interconnect utilizing fast ETHERNET technology that incorporates switching with bridging, serving,
and routing functionality, and shall obtain the Engineer’s approval thereof before the ordering of materials or
fabrication of network products.
For standard manufacturer products specifically named or specified in this specification, the Contractor shall submit
manufacturer’s off-the-shelf product drawings and minimum specifications to the Engineer for review and approval.
The Contractor’s design of the network shall be based upon the Contractor’s expertise in the system integration of
fast ETHERNET products.
The Contractor shall specify all products as required.
These may include:
 Routers.
 Bridges.
 Hubs.
 Concentrators and port switches.
 Optical fiber cables, patch panels, cords, splices, and distribution panels.
 Servers.
 Switching Modules/Cards.
 Optical Fiber Tx/Rx Modules/Cards.
 Communications interface cards.
 Power Supplies.
 Hot Standby Protection Units.
 Intelligent Connectivity and Switching Products.
 Alarm Modules / Cards.
 Networking software, including set-up software.
 Network Interface Cards (NICs).
 Network Management System (NMS).
 Service Adaptation Modules / Cards.
 Enclosures.

Technical Specifications 6-122 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Rack or panel mount chassis.

 Powerline Carrier Units.
 Network Diagnostic System.
 Airfield lamp bases and isolation devices.
 All other airfield lamp products necessary in order to provide complete operational AFLCMS (to
be determined by the contractor).
 Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS).
 Category 5 wiring products (where needed).
Network transport between the control tower, maintenance, and substations (vaults) shall be fast ETHERNET, IEEE
Standards based.
Operating system for the computers shall be based on the latest version of windows or similar.
Protocols shall be TCP/IP based on IEEE, ETHERNET Standards, unless otherwise specified.
All electrical airfield lighting materials and hardware necessary for the proper operation of the system, even though
not specifically discussed in the Contract Documents, shall be deemed to be part of the Contract Work Scope. This
includes separate data communications cable and power cable lamp control and monitoring devices, conduits,
isolating devices, grounding devices, spacers, connectors, wire, cable, bases, boxes, protectors, and all necessary
components to provide a fully operational system.
The communication network to AFL-Substations, Maintenance Station & Control Tower shall be redundant and
provide two independent communication links.
The AFLCMS communication network shall be dedicated communication network designed solely for the
AFLCMS, to assure most reliable and predictable control & monitoring system.
In the design a redundant fiber optical loop (ring) shall be used. The ring shall connect the areas of control tower and
all electrical substations and the maintenance workshop.
The Fiber Optic Communication System shall be supplied and installed by a qualified fiber communications
specialist.
The Network shall be based on a 622 Mbps fiber optic ‘backbone’ which allows transparent data transmission.
This backbone shall provide an intelligent cabling system to transport data between different nodes which may be
located in different sites with long distances between them. The nodes shall be configured by plug-in modules to
serve the Ethernet networks.
In case of a failure in the link module or in a single optical fiber, the system shall switch over to an alternate path. If
there is a break in the optical fiber cable and a node is unreachable the data flow shall be redirected by the A/B logic
switch-modules using the reverse direction on the second fiber to close the ring again.
If the cable is broken, the fault shall be recognized and the link shall automatically switch over to the secondary link
so that the ring is closed again.
The power supply, link- and switch-modules, and the backbone shall be redundant. All modules shall allow ‘hot
swapping’ without disturbing the system.
Mapping of the network shall be software controlled in transparent mode by workstation (PC). Diagnostics, control
and management activities shall be carried out via network management software. Network Management shall be
done from the control tower for all nodes. All important information like alarms, status information and statistics
shall be displayed on the Technical Working Positions.

6.3.2.9 AFLCMS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

AFLCMS Software shall be developed using advanced methods, languages, tools and standards, such as C++,
JAVA, ADA, G2, RDBMS, Object Oriented Methods, CORBA etc
Format and control of all airfield lights and devices shall be an automatic function provided by the CPUs.
The Contractor’s software developer shall test and demonstrate the AFLCMS software to the Owner and Engineer
for review and approval. In the event of a failure within the central processing units (CPUs), an important objective
is that airfield lighting system operation must be continued.

Technical Specifications 6-123 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

In the event of a main CPU failure, backup PC elements shall automatically be switched on. Uninterrupted power
supplies and/or battery charger/sealed battery plants shall power all AFLCMS products. The system design shall
contain fully redundant hot-standby CPUs (A & B) for both tower controller positions.
The AFLCMS data shall be fully backed up. In case of an update of the software due to newly changed data, and in
case of a fault with the new data, it shall be possible to revert immediately to the previous version.
All Work Stations and Servers supplied within the scope of AFLCMS shall consist of the following:
 Latest Antivirus Software.
 System utility Programs.
 Remote Support Software such as PC-Anywhere.

6.3.2.9.1 SOFTWARE VERSION CONTROL

The manufacturer shall keep all software associated with the AFLCMS under appropriate version control. Software
version control shall meet the following minimum requirements:
 AFLCMS manufacturer shall have established ISO-9002 certified software control procedures.
 Proper software coding techniques shall be practiced including software remarks where
appropriate.
 All AFLCMS software shall be version controlled utilizing a software version control system.
 Software versions shall be date stamped with the ability to track software changes.
 All software documentation comments & remarks for the coding shall be in English.
 All AFLCMS software shall be stored electronically.[Available on the network]
 The Backup copies of the software shall be stored appropriately.

6.3.2.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

The optical fiber cable shall contain a minimum of 72 fibers in each route (144 fibers total) between the control
tower and electrical substations for present and future airfield lighting requirements. The cable shall meet or exceed
the following specifications and shall conform to the latest issue of ANSI/EIA-472 “Generic Specification for Fiber
Optic Cables.”
Cable construction other than that specified shall be approved by the Engineer. The cable shall be non-metallic and
constructed wholly from dielectric materials. The cable shall be suitable for installation along high-voltage electrical
corridors/paths without external protection.
The cable shall be of loose tube construction with up to 12 buffer tubes wrapped around a dielectric central strength
member. The buffer tubes and fibers shall be color coded or shall provide an identification scheme so that they can
be easily identified by construction field personnel without the use of special equipment or tools. All fibers shall be
contained within buffer tubes, and each buffer tube shall have an inside diameter much greater than the total
diameter of the fibers it contains. Each fiber or group of fibers shall be free-floating within the buffer tubes such
that all mechanically or environmentally induced stress placed upon the cable is totally decoupled from the fibers.
The air within the buffer tubes shall be displaced with a gel to prevent entry by water and to facilitate free
movement of the fibers within.
The cable shall have an interstitial filling between the buffer tubes and throughout the length of the cable to prevent
entry of water. A binder wrapping strength member of Kevlar of similar material shall be provided as a final layer
prior to application of the outer jacket.
The cable shall be thermoplastic and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Specification D-1047-62T for
polyvinyl chloride jacket compound for electrical insulated wire and cable, and low smoke, zero halogen as stated in
ASTM E662 for smoke density and UL 1666 and UL 1581 for flame requirements. The sheath thickness shall be a
minimum of 1.3 mm. The cable shall be provided in continuous lengths as specified. Each fiber shall be pulled from
the same optical waveguide form and shall be free of splices. Optical fibers shall be made of pure silica.
A marking scheme shall be employed on the outer jacket of the cable showing the date of manufacture and the
manufacturer’s name. A numerical sequence shall be marked on the outer jacket at intervals no greater than 3
meters to facilitate determination of cable length and length of cable remaining on the reel.
The minimum recommended optical specifications are

Technical Specifications 6-124 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Operation Wavelength: 1550 nm


o
Optical Attenuation: @ 1550 nm: 0.6 dB/km at 20 C
 Optical Dispersion: @ 1550 nm: < 20 psec/nm-km
 Zero Dispersion Wavelength: 1290 to 1330 nm
 Fiber Core Diameter: (Contractor Determine)
 Fiber Coating Diameter: 250 um + 15
 Fiber Cladding Diameter: 125 um + 3
 Core Cladding Concentricity: < 1.0 um
 Refractive Index Difference: 0.3 + 0.5%
The minimum recommended mechanical specifications are
 Crush Resistance: 5000 N/m (length of cable)
 Minimum Bending Radius:
 Installation: 26.2 cm
 Static: 13.1 cm
 Operational Temperature: -30 °C to +60 °C
 Storage: -40 °C to +60 °C (on reel)
 Humidity: 0 to 100% inclusive
 Tensile Strength:
 Installation: 2700 N (600 lbs)
 Static: 600 N (135 lbs)
All fiber splice shelves, fiber distribution panels, jack fields and fiber patchcords and pigtails necessary to form a
complete and operational multi-mode fiber optic cable system operating at 1550 nm shall be provided, installed, and
tested as required under these specifications.
The fiber splice shelves shall be off-the-shelf standard products.
Fiber distribution panels (FDPs) shall be off-the-shelf standard products. Adapters and receptacles shall be the
biconic type, unless otherwise specified in other Contract documents. Individual fiber pigtails shall be provided for
both tail ends of each fiber within the cables supplied under these specifications. They shall be made of the same
quality optical material as the cable. They shall have jacket material suitable for inter-rack wiring. One end shall be
equipped with a connector which shall mate with the fiber distribution panel. The pigtails shall be fusion spliced to
the outside plant fiber optic cables within the fiber splice shelves. They shall have sufficient length to terminate
within the fiber distribution panel and include slack loops as recommended by the manufacturer of the fiber
distribution panel.
Fiber patch-cords shall be identical in construction to the pigtails and shall have connectors on both ends of the
fiber. They shall be of sufficient length to interconnect the fiber distribution panel to the fiber optic equipment with
adequate slack to allow reconnection to any fiber optic cable or connector appearing in the same equipment rack.
Patch cords shall be provided for operational and standby fibers only, and shall be enclosed within inner ducts when
external to equipment.

6.3.2.10.1 Manufacturing Qualifications

The cable manufacturers shall have at least five (5) years of reliable experience in supplying fiber optic cables, and
shall have installed a minimum of 600,000 meters of fiber. A list of such installations shall be provided.

6.3.2.10.2 Technical Data

The manufacturer shall provide full technical data which demonstrates compliance with the requirements of these
specifications. Within 30 days after Contract award, the manufacturer shall furnish sample specimens in 15 cm
lengths.

Technical Specifications 6-125 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

The Contractor shall certify compliance with the following:

 The Contractor shall warrant that the design, material, and workmanship incorporated in each
item of cable shall be of the highest grade, consistent with established and generally accepted
standards for fiber optic cable for optical communications systems, and that each such item and
every part and component thereof shall comply with these specifications.
 The Contractor agrees that this 20-year warranty shall commence with the acceptance of each
item of the cable, whether the defect is patent or latent.
 The Contractor warrants that 100 percent of the 72 fibers provided within each cable route (total
of 144 fibers) shall meet or exceed the specifications set forth herein for a period of 20 years.

6.3.2.10.3 Cable Tests

 The Contractor and manufacturer shall ensure that the approved quality assurance program is
being closely adhered to and that the cable is being manufactured in accordance with these
specifications and the approved submittals.
 The Contractor and manufacturer shall ensure that each furnished and installed fiber optic cable
shall be traceable to the test date on file for each step in its manufacturing process.
 Random samples, selected at the place of production, shall be physically tested. Test samples shall
be taken from the accessible ends of the reels. Each reel and corresponding sample shall be
identified. The sample number and length shall be as specified for each test. All applicable tests
shall be performed for the cable materials and cable construction specified.
 Optical tests shall be performed on the entire length of each continuous fiber provided within each
fiber optic cable. Each test shall be completed during manufacture, as required, and again prior to
shipping when the cable is secured to the reel in final packaged form for shipping.
 The manufacturer shall provide, at the point of production, apparatus and labor to perform the
following tests:
 Tensile strength.
 Impact resistance, crushing and flexing.
 Optical spectral attenuation.
 Optical spectral bandwidth.
 Optical spectral dispersion.
 Optical time domain reflectometry.

6.3.2.10.4 Field Installation Tests.

 Optical fiber cable shall be tested after complete installation and termination of the cable.
 The installer shall provide the following equipment to install and test the cable. All test
equipment shall become the property of the Owner.
 Microprocessor controlled fusion splicer, Orionics Products, Model FW305 or equivalent.
 Fusion splicer tool kit (to support item 1).
 Optical time domain reflectometer.
 Fiber optic emergency restoration kit, Siecor Corp., ERK-S12 or equivalent.
 Fiber optic emergency restoration tool kit, Siecor Corp or equivalent.
 Optical testing shall be performed on all 72 fibers within each cable (total of 144 fibers) and also
on those extra fibers which the manufacturer elects to include in addition to those required.
 Testing shall be performed from fiber end to fiber end, as terminated on the fiber distribution
panels, and shall not include any optical patch cords, except as called for in cable manufacturer or
test equipment manufacturer testing procedures.
 The following tests shall be performed by the Contractor and installer.

Technical Specifications 6-126 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 Fiber optical attenuation (1550 nm).

 Optical time domain reflectometer photographic records (labeled and identified).
 Test Reports: the Contractor shall submit six copies for approval
 A list of cable manufacturer’s fiber optic installations for the past five (5) years.
 Cable manufacturer’s quality assurance program, including test procedures.
 Full technical data and product cut-sheets for type of cable to be provided.
 Cable test reports for all demonstration tests required.
 Cable test and inspection reports for tests and inspections required and described in these
specifications.
 Certified test reports of cable tests conducted in the field in accordance with approved testing
procedures, including labeled and identified optical time domain reflectometer photographic
records. Information to be supplied by the certified cable test reports shall include the following:
 Report number.
 Date and location of test.
 Description of test and test conditions.
 Complete cable description.
 Lot, batch, and reel identification number.
 Quantitative tests results.
 Summary of test results.
 Information on the components of the cable tested, including batch numbers and physical,
optical, and electrical properties.
 The Contractor and manufacturer shall submit a completed, signed, and notarized test report sheet
as part of each cable test report prior to shipping each batch of cable.
All cable shall be shipped on reels adequately protected from damage in shipment by heavy wrapping or wood
lagging, including the hazard of reels moving obliquely against each other. The manufacturer shall also be
responsible for any defect in the cable occurring during normal transit. The external protective wrapping shall be
secured to ensure damage-free shipment.
Each length of cable shall be wound on a separate reel. Reels shall be substantial to withstand handling. Reels shall
be designed so that the inner end of the cable will be secured, accessible, and protected from injury. If the inner end
of the cable projects through the reel flange, it shall be protected by a suitable cover of metal having rounded ends
and sides, and securely fastened in place. Both cable ends on the reel shall be secured in place to prevent their
becoming loose in transit or in handling.
The radius of the reel drums shall be larger than the minimum static bending radius of the cable to prevent damage
to the cable during reeling. The arbor hole shall admit a spindle 6.35 cm in diameter without binding. The reels shall
be designed and constructed as non-returnable when drum size, cable weight, and volume permit.
After passing factory tests, the cable shall be effectively sealed against moisture. Both ends of each length of cable
shall be protected by rubber and plastic tape wrappings, an effective boot taped or sealed into place, or other suitable
means. The use of friction tape, other than as an external mechanical protection over an adequate rubber or plastic
tape, shall not be acceptable. The cable end protection shall be adequate to protect the cable during shipment and
prolonged external storage in weather if not immediately employed, without regard to the position of the reel.
Each layer of cable on the reel shall be closely and tightly wound in a uniform manner.

6.3.2.10.5 Cable Fire Proofing

Cables shall be fireproofed in locations where AC power cables are present.
Cable fireproofing tapes shall be installed to comply with the tape manufacturer’s recommendations, including
method of taping with approved cords and tapes. At each cable entrance, fireproofing shall include the installation of
a plastic cable duct shield to protect the cable jacket.

Technical Specifications 6-127 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

Fireproofing tapes and ties shall be suitable for installation where alternate periods of submersion in foul water may
be expected. Tape shall be non-asbestos product that will maintain arc and fireproofing properties for the life of the
cable.

6.3.3 EXECUTION

6.3.3.1 INSTALLATION

6.3.3.1.1 Materials
Provide all equipment, hardware, accessories, terminal blocks, lights, regulators, transformers, indicators, beacons,
signs, patch panels, connectors, equipment cabinets, bases, isolation devices, conduits, raceways, cable trays, cables,
frames, and wiring required for mechanical and electrical installation of the AFLCMS products as specified herein.
Installation of all system components shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings and Specifications and
consistent with ICAO installation practices. Pathways and spaces shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A
Building Standards. Safety requirements shall be in accordance with Local Authorities requirements.

6.3.3.1.2 Control Tower Installation

Furnish and install AFLCMS equipment in the control tower cab and equipment rooms. Connect all appropriate
system cabling and wiring to the equipment. Connect the 240VAC, 1 Phase, 50 Hz power cables as required for the
AFLCMS equipment via protected AC power. Wiring shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568.
Administration shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606.

6.3.3.1.3 Substation Installation

Furnish and install AFLCMS and all cabling required to complete installation of the AFLCMS. AFLCMS cables
shall be installed in conduits. Wiring shall be in accordance with ICAO/FAA Standards and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568.
Administration shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606.

6.3.3.1.4 Maintenance Shop Installation

Furnish and install AFLCMS equipment in the maintenance shop. Connect all appropriate airfield lighting wiring
and cabling to the equipment. Connect the 240V AC, 1 Phase, 50 Hz power cables as required for the system
equipment via surge arrestors and protected AC power outlet strips. Wiring shall be in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568. Administration shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606.

6.3.3.1.5 Airfield Installation

Furnish and install AFLCMS equipment throughout the airfield. Wiring shall be in accordance with BICSI,
QGEWC, NEMA, ICAO, FAA, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568. Administration of the works shall be in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA - 606.

6.3.3.1.5.1 INSTALLATION INSPECTION

Following the completion of the installation of all equipment at each facility, inspect all equipment wiring to verify
that all mechanical and electrical connections have been made and properly secured, all hardware has been installed
in the proper location, and all wiring has been properly terminated and protected.
The inspection shall include conductor shield continuity and isolation and ground verification of all installed wiring.
Data sheets containing evidence of such inspections, certified as correct by the Contractor’s quality control engineer,
shall be delivered to the Engineer for approval.

6.3.3.1.5.2 TESTING
The AFLCMS manufacturer shall provide a set of test documents detailing the level of testing to be performed. The
AFLCMS testing shall meet the criteria outlined in this section.
Furnish all testing equipment, testing procedures, tools, and special required items for testing the
telecommunications and AFLCMS infrastructure, network cabling, premises distribution system, wiring, pathways
and spaces. All tests shall be scheduled a minimum of 7 days in advance of performance of tests.

6.3.3.1.5.2.1 Factory Acceptance Test

The AFLCMS manufacturer shall perform a Factory Acceptance test at the manufacturer’s facility to assure that the
AFLCMS meets the requirements of the specification in presence of the Client’s and Engineer’s representatives’
team; the team will comprise three representatives per each mission, the mission could be to inspect one or more

Technical Specifications 6-128 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

equipment.
Factory testing of all equipment shall be performed by the product manufacturers and witnessed by the
owner/Engineer at the manufacturing plant location using the standard production inspection and testing procedures
in normal use by the manufacturer. Certification of the testing shall be provided to the Engineer.

6.3.3.1.5.2.2 Site Acceptance Test

The AFLCMS manufacturer shall perform a SAT on site to assure that the AFLCMS meets the requirements of the
specification. The SAT shall demonstrate operation of the software and hardware design.
Site Acceptance Test (Installation Testing) of all equipment shall be performed at the on-site facility by the
Contractor. This testing shall include connectivity, isolation, grounding, and functional tests of each item of
equipment to ensure its proper operation in the system as well as testing of the assembled products as a complete
turn-key system to ensure that each component works properly and reacts to all of the other components as required
by the manufacturer’s specifications and written requirements.
The Contractor produced test procedure for installation testing and fine tuning at each facility shall be approved by
the owner/Engineer prior to formal AFLCMS equipment power-up and set-up testing. The testing shall demonstrate
full compliance with the various requirements of the Contractor’s and manufacturer’s minimum specifications.
System testing of the complete system shall be performed following the successful completion of the equipment
installation testing. System testing shall consist of the following:
 Functional testing of each piece of equipment.
 System testing and fine tuning the hardware and software in order to demonstrate the system
requirements as specified herein.
Integrated system testing of the completed system shall follow completion of the system testing for each individual
facility. This testing shall be performed to verify that all system components are properly interfaced and working
together and complies with ICAO flight test and inspection requirements.
Contractor shall submit a written record of all test results.
When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall provide testing support upon
request by the owner to assist in additional testing of the AFLCMS after initial acceptance by the Engineer/eEnd
user.

6.3.3.1.5.3 TRAINING

6.3.3.1.5.3.1 Training Schedule

Schedule training with owner with at least 30 days’ advance notice.
6.3.3.1.5.3.1.1 Training
Conduct a minimum of two weeks’ training of owner’s personnel in operation, preventive maintenance,
troubleshooting, and user-programming (mapping) of the system. The owner’s team could be trained to handle one
or more equipment. The team will comprise minimum four persons. Include both classroom training and hands-on
training with equipment supplied.
Training should be for 3 levels:
 Engineer/Traffic controller (ATC)
 Formen
 Technician
The AFLCMS manufacturer shall provide the following trainings

6.3.3.1.5.3.2 ATC Training

 The amount & length of training classes required shall be provided with the offer.
 The training classes for the ATC personnel shall be carried out utilizing the simulators.
 The number of classes shall be coordinated.
 The ATC training shall include the following at the minimum:

Technical Specifications 6-129 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

 General System Overview

 Theory of Operation.
 Review of AFL
 Operator interface HMI.
 Review of Touch Screen Operations.
 Review of preset & control sequences.
 Review any other system functionalities.
 Review of Alarm messages.
 Review of failsafe scenarios and actions to be performed during failsafe.
 Review procedures for granting & relinquish control for maintenance.

6.3.3.1.5.3.3 Maintenance/ Operation Training

 The amount & length of training required for the maintenance and other personnel shall be
provided with the offer.
 The training classes for the maintenance personnel shall be carried out utilizing the live
system/simulator or test setup.
 The training shall include theory & practical with troubleshooting exercises.
 The total number of classes, duration etc. shall be coordinated.
 The maintenance training shall include the following minimum criteria:
 Review system block diagram – Theory of operation.
 Review As-Built drawings, System assemblies & wiring diagrams.
 Review Maintenance HMI Interface.
 Review System Maintenance.
 Hands on Troubleshooting.
 Review failsafe scenarios and handling of the situation.
 Review System reports.
 Review control & monitoring capabilities.

6.3.3.1.5.3.4 System Engineer/ System Administrator Training

 The amount and the length of training provided shall be mentioned in the offer.
 This training shall be much advanced and may include on-site and factory trainings.
 This training shall include of the following at the minimum:
 In-depth System overview – Theory of Operation.
 Detailed System, Sub-System Testing & Commissioning procedures.
 Over all System Reconfiguration.
 Enhanced System Diagnostics, Troubleshooting & maintenance.
 Enhanced Training for Third Party Products.
 Operating System Management.
 RDBMS Administration & Management.
 Development of Software Interfaces, Drivers for Third Party Equipments. [Such as Single
Lamp Control Sub System., CCR’s Sensor System etc.]
 Complete in-house customization of the software, Hardware, HMI etc.

Technical Specifications 6-130 Rev F – September 2019

 CONSTRUCTION OF MSALATO INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – PHASE ONE, LOT 1

6.3.3.1.5.3.5 Training Aids

Use approved manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manual material as an instructional aid. Provide copies of
this material for use in instruction. Provide all special set-up tools, including test equipment for training.

Technical Specifications 6-131 Rev F – September 2019